You are on page 1of 240

MODEL VT660/560/460

VT660G/560G/460G
VT660J/460J(Japanese model)

LCD Projector
SERVICE MANUAL PART No.3N9911087

Better Service
Better Reputation
Better Profit

SAFETY CAUTION:
Before servicing this chassis, it is important that the service
technician read and follow the Safety Precautions and Product
Safety Notice in this Service Manual.

WARNING:
SHOCK HAZARD - Use an isolation transformer when servicing.
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ................................................................................................. 2-1

USERS MANUAL (VT660/VT560/VT460) ........................................................................ E-2


QUICK GUIDE (VT660/VT560/VT460) ............................................................................. 1-2

TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................................................... 4-1


Operational checks .................................................................................................................................. 4-1
POWER block .......................................................................................................................................... 4-2
I/O sync block, and ADC block ................................................................................................................ 4-4
LCD driver block ...................................................................................................................................... 4-9
Auto-trapezoid corrector block ................................................................................................................. 4-11
Picture quality judgment standard ............................................................................................................ 4-12

METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS ......................................................................................... 5-1


PC control software .................................................................................................................................. 5-1
Serviceman Menu .................................................................................................................................... 5-42
Adjustment of the optical axis .................................................................................................................. 5-48
Adjustment of the polarizing plate ............................................................................................................ 5-52
Jig PWB/Cable ......................................................................................................................................... 5-53
Cleaning of Lens and Mirror ..................................................................................................................... 5-55

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................. 6-1


I/O terminals ............................................................................................................................................. 6-1
Input signals ............................................................................................................................................. 6-1
Circuit operation ....................................................................................................................................... 6-2
SEQUENCE ............................................................................................................................................. 6-7

METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY .......................................................................................... 7-1

DISASSEMBLY ................................................................................................................ 8-1


Main body ................................................................................................................................................ 8-1
Engine SASSY ......................................................................................................................................... 8-2
PS ASSY .................................................................................................................................................. 8-3

ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM .................................................................................................... 9-1

PACKAGING .................................................................................................................... 10-1


VT660 ...................................................................................................................................................... 10-1
VT560 ...................................................................................................................................................... 10-2
VT460 ...................................................................................................................................................... 10-3
VT660G .................................................................................................................................................... 10-4
VT560G .................................................................................................................................................... 10-5
VT460G .................................................................................................................................................... 10-6
VT660J ..................................................................................................................................................... 10-7
VT460J ..................................................................................................................................................... 10-8

1-1
REPLACMENT PART LIST .............................................................................................. 11-1
VT660 ...................................................................................................................................................... 11-1
VT560 ...................................................................................................................................................... 11-6
VT460 ...................................................................................................................................................... 11-11
VT660G .................................................................................................................................................... 11-16
VT560G .................................................................................................................................................... 11-21
VT460G .................................................................................................................................................... 11-26
VT660J ..................................................................................................................................................... 11-31
VT460J ..................................................................................................................................................... 11-36

CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ............................................................................................. 12-1

BLOCK DIAGRAMS ......................................................................................................... 13-1

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................ 14-1


MAIN PWB (VT660/VT560) ..................................................................................................................... 14-1
I/O PWB (VT660/VT560) ......................................................................................................................... 14-11
MAIN PWB (VT460) ................................................................................................................................. 14-12
I/O PWB (VT460) ..................................................................................................................................... 14-22

1-2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE


COVER. NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING
TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

This symbol warns the user that uninsulated voltage within the unit may
have sufficient magnitude to cause electric shock. Therefore, it is dangerous
to make any kind of contact with any part inside of this unit.

This symbol alerts the user that important literature concerning the
operation and maintenance of this unit has been included.
Therefore, it should be read carefully in order to avoid any problems.

ATTENTION
RISQUE D'ELECTROCUTION
NE PAS OUVRIR

MISE EN GARDE: AFIN DE REDUIRE LES RISQUES D' ELECTROCUTION, NE PAS


DEPOSER LE COUVERCLE, IL N'Y A AUCUNE PIECE
UTILISABLE A L'INTERIEUR DE CET APPAREIL. NE CONFIER
LES TRAVAUX D'ENTRETIEN QU'A UN PERSONNEL QUALIFIE.

Ce symbole a pour but de prvenir I' utilisateur de la prsence d'


une tension dangereuse, non isole se trouvant l' intrieur de l'
appareil. Elle est d' une intensit suffisante pour constituer un risque
d' lectrocution. Eviter le contact avec les pices l' intrieur de
cet appareil.

Ce symbole a pour but de prvenir l' utilisateur de la prsence d'


importantes instructions concernant l' entretien et le fonctionnement
de cet appareil. Par consquent, elles doivent tre lues
attentivement afin d' viter des problmes.

2-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

During servicing carefully observe the following. 5. LAMP


Be very careful of the lamp because it generates high
1. OBSERVE ALL PRECAUTIONS heat while it is used at high voltage. When replacing
Items and locations that require special care during serv- the bulb, make sure it is cool enough.
icing, such as the cabinet, chassis, and parts are labelled
with individual safety instructions. Carefully comply with 6. LENS
these instructions and all precautions in the instruction Do not look into the lens during projection. This important
manual. to avoid damage to the eyes.

2. BE CAREFUL OF ELECTRIC SHOCK 7. SERVICING


The chassis carries an AC voltage. If you touch the At the time of repair or inspection services, use an earth
chassis while it is still alive, you will get a severe shock. band (wrist band), without fail.
If you think the chassis is alive, use an isolating
transformer or gloves, or pull out the plug before 8. RUN A COMPLETE SAFETY CHECK AT THE
replacing any parts. COMPLETION OF SERVICING
After completion of servicing, confirm that all screws,
3. USE SPECIFIED PARTS parts, and wiring, removed or disconnected for servicing,
The components have been chosen for minimum have been returned to their original positions. Also
flammability and for specific levels of resistance value examine if the serviced sections and peripheral areas
and withstand voltage. Replacement parts must match have suffered from any deterioration as a result of
these original specifications. Parts whose specifications servicing. In addition, check insulation between external
are particularly vital to safe use and maintenance of the metallic parts and blades of wall-outlet plugs. This
set are marked on the circuit diagrams and parts list. examination is indispensable in confirming complete
Substitution of these parts can be dangerous for you establishment of safety.
and the customer, so use only specified parts.
(Insulation check)
4. REMOUNT ALL PARTS AND RECONNECT ALL Pull out a plug from a wall outlet to disconnect the
WIRES AS ORIGINALLY INSTALLED connection cable. Then turn on the POWER switch.
For safety, insulating tape and tubes are used Use a 500V megger (Note 2) and confirm that the
throughout, but some lift-off parts on the printed wiring insulation resistance is 1M or more between each
board require special attention. terminal of the plug and exposed external metal (Note
All wires are positioned away from high-temperature and 1). If the measured value is below the specified level,
high-voltage parts, and, if removed for servicing, they then it is necessary to inspect and fix the set.
must be retuned precisely to their original positions.
(Note 1)
Exposed external metal....RGB input terminals, control
terminals, etc.
(Note 2)
If a 500V megger is not available for an unavoidable
reason, then use a circuit tester or the like for inspection.

2-2
Portable Projector

VT660/VT560/VT460
Users Manual
Important Information
Safety Cautions RF Interference
Precautions
WARNING
Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC VT660/VT560/
The Federal Communications Commission does not allow any
VT460 Projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. Your
modifications or changes to the unit EXCEPT those specified
serial number is located on the bottom of your projector. Record it here:
by NEC Soluctions (America), Inc. in this manual. Failure to com-
ply with this government regulation could void your right to
CAUTION
operate this equipment. This equipment has been tested and
To turn off main power, be sure to remove the plug from power
found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
outlet.
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
The power outlet socket should be installed as near to the
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
equipment as possible, and should be easily accessible.
in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses,
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
CAUTION
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
TO PREVENT SHOCK, DO NOT OPEN THE CABINET.
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guar-
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
antee that interference will not occur in a particular installa-
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED NEC SERVICE PER-
tion. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio
SONNEL.
or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
This symbol warns the user that uninsulated voltage within the
the interference by one or more of the following measures:
unit may be sufficient to cause electrical shock. Therefore, it is
dangerous to make any kind of contact with any part inside of Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
the unit. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

This symbol alerts the user that important information con- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
cerning the operation and maintenance of this unit has been that to which the receiver is connected.
provided. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for
The information should be read carefully to avoid problems. help.

In UK, a BS approved power cable with moulded plug has a Black (five
WARNING Amps) fuse installed for use with this equipment. If a power cable is not
TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO supplied with this equipment please contact your supplier.
RAIN OR MOISTURE.
DO NOT USE THIS UNITS PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION CORD Important Safeguards
OR IN AN OUTLET UNLESS ALL TWO PRONGS CAN BE FULLY These safety instructions are to ensure the long life of your projector
INSERTED. and to prevent fire and shock. Please read them carefully and heed all
DO NOT OPEN THE CABINET. THERE ARE HIGH-VOLTAGE COM- warnings.
PONENTS INSIDE. ALL SERVICING MUST BE DONE BY QUALI-
FIED NEC SERVICE PERSONNEL. Installation
DOC Compliance Notice 1. For best results, use your projector in a darkened room.

This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian 2. Place the projector on a flat, level surface in a dry area away from
Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. dust and moisture.
3. Do not place your projector in direct sunlight, near heaters or heat
Acoustic Noise Information Ordinance-3. GSGV: radiating appliances.
The sound pressure level is less than 70 dB (A) according 4. Exposure to direct sunlight, smoke or steam can harm internal com-
to ISO 3744 or ISO 7779. ponents.
5. Handle your projector carefully. Dropping or jarring can damage in-
ternal components.
CAUTION
Avoid displaying stationary images for a prolonged pe- 6. Do not place heavy objects on top of the projector.
riod of time. 7. If you wish to have the projector installed on the ceiling:
Doing so can result in these images being temporarily a. Do not attempt to install the projector yourself.
sustained on the surface of the LCD panel.
If this should happen, continue to use your projector. The b. The projector must be installed by qualified technicians in order
static background from previous images will disappear. to ensure proper operation and reduce the risk of bodily injury.
Do not put the projector on its side when the lamp is c. In addition, the ceiling must be strong enough to support the
turned on. projector and the installation must be in accordance with any
Doing so may cause damage to the projector. local building codes.
d. Please consult your dealer for more information.

E-2
Fire and Shock Precautions What's in the Box?
1. Ensure that there is sufficient ventilation and that vents are unob- Make sure your box contains everything listed. If any pieces are miss-
structed to prevent the build-up of heat inside your projector. Allow ing, contact your dealer.
at least 3 inches (10 cm) of space between your projector and a Please save the original box and packing materials if you ever need to
wall. ship your VT660/VT560/VT460 Projector.
2. Prevent foreign objects such as paper clips and bits of paper from
falling into your projector.
Do not attempt to retrieve any objects that might fall into your pro-
jector. Do not insert any metal objects such as a wire or screwdriver
into your projector. If something should fall into your projector, dis-
connect it immediately and have the object removed by a qualified
NEC service personnel.
Lens cap
3. Do not place any liquids on top of your projector. (24F38091)
4. Do not look into the lens while the projector is on. Serious damage Projector
to your eyes could result.
5. Keep any items such as magnifying glass out of the light path of the

O
FF
VI
DE
projector. The light being projected from the lens is extensive, there-

PO
S-

W
VI

ER
DE
O

O
RG

N
B

AU
TO
AD
J.
fore any kind of abnormal objects that can redirect light coming out

S
E
LE
C
T
PJ

of the lens, can cause unpredictable outcome such as fire or injury


PIC
TU
RE
HE
LP
FR AS
EE PE
ZE CT
MA PIC
GN -MU

to the eyes.
IFY TE

VO
LU
ME

6. Do not cover the lens with the supplied lens cap or equivalent while
the projector is on. Doing so can lead to melting of the cap and
possibly burning your hands due to the heat emitted from the light Remote control Batteries String and rivet
output. (7N900381) (24C05051) (24C04531)
7. The projector is designed to operate on a power supply of 100-120
or 200-240 V 50/60 Hz AC. Ensure that your power supply fits this
requirement before attempting to use your projector.
8. Handle the power cable carefully and avoid excessive bending.
A damaged cord can cause electric shock or fire.
9. If the projector is not to be used for an extended period of time,
disconnect the plug from the power outlet.
10. Do not touch the power plug during a thunderstorm. Doing so can Power cable USB cable RGB signal cable
cause electrical shock or fire. (US: 7N080206) (7N520013) (7N520012)
(EU: 7N080005)

CAUTION
1. Do not try to touch the ventilation outlet on the front as it can be-
come heated while the projector is turned on.
2. Do no use the tilt-foot for purposes other than originally intended.
Misuses such as gripping the tilt-foot or hanging on the wall can
cause damage to the projector.
3. When carrying the projector by the carrying handle, make sure the
two screws that attach the carrying handle to the projector cabinet
are tight.
Insufficient tightening of the two screws could result in the projector
falling and causing injury. Soft carrying case Carrying handle, Screw (M42)
4. Enable High-Speed Fan mode if you continue to use the projector (24BS7201) Flathead screwdriver
for consecutive days. (From the menu, select [Advanced] [High (Handle: 24F38031)
Speed Fan Mode].) (Screw: 24N06281)
5. Do not unplug the power cable from the wall outlet under any one of (Screwdriver: 24C07231)
Qu nec

the following circumstances.


Co uid

ic t
k
n e
G

Im rm
In
po ati

Doing so can cause damage to the projector:


fo

rta on
nt

* While the Hour Glass icon appears.


* While the cooling fans are running. (The cooling fans continue
to work for 60 seconds after the projector is turned off).
Lamp Replacement For North America only
To replace the lamp, follow all instructions provided on page E-30. Registration card
Limited warranty CD-ROM
Be sure to replace the lamp when the message "The lamp has Users manual
reached the end of its usable life. Please replace the lamp." For Europe only
appears. If you continue to use the lamp after the lamp has reached Guarantee policy
the end of its usable life, the lamp bulb may shatter, and pieces of
glass may be scattered in the lamp case. Do not touch them as the
pieces of glass may cause injury.
If this happens, contact your NEC dealer for lamp replacement.
Allow a minimum of 60 seconds to elapse after turning off the pro-
jector. Then turn off the main power switch, disconnect the power
cable and allow 60 minutes to cool the projector before replacing
the lamp.
E-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Important Information ..................................................... E-2 TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................ E-32
Safety Cautions ............................................................................................................... E-2 Power Indicator ............................................................................................................. E-32
What's in the Box? .......................................................................................................... E-3 Status Indicator ............................................................................................................. E-32
Lamp Indicator .............................................................................................................. E-32
INTRODUCTION .............................................................. E-5 Common Problems & Solutions .................................................................................... E-33
Introduction to the Projector ........................................................................................... E-5
Part Names of the Projector ............................................................................................ E-6 SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................... E-34
Attaching the lens cap ................................................................................................. E-6
Attaching the supplied carrying handle ........................................................................ E-6 APPENDIX ................................................................... E-35
Top Features ................................................................................................................ E-7 Cabinet Dimensions ...................................................................................................... E-35
Terminal Panel Features ............................................................................................... E-8 Pin Assignments of D-Sub RGB Input Connector .......................................................... E-35
Part Names of the Remote Control .............................................................................. E-9 Compatible Input Signal List ......................................................................................... E-36
Battery Installation ................................................................................................. E-10 TravelCare Guide ........................................................................................................... E-37
Remote Control Precautions .................................................................................. E-10
Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control ...................................................... E-10

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS ....................................... E-11


Setting Up the Screen and the Projector ....................................................................... E-11
Selecting a Location .................................................................................................. E-11
Throw Distance and Screen Size ............................................................................... E-12
Making Connections ...................................................................................................... E-13
Connecting Your PC or Macintosh Computer ............................................................ E-13
To connect SCART output (RGB) ............................................................................... E-14
Connecting an External Monitor ................................................................................ E-14
Connecting Your DVD Player ..................................................................................... E-15
Connecting Your VCR or Laser Disc Player ............................................................... E-16
Connecting the Supplied Power Cable ....................................................................... E-16

PROJECTING AN IMAGE (BASIC OPERATION) ........................... E-17


Turning on the Projector ................................................................................................ E-17
Selecting a Source ......................................................................................................... E-18
Adjusting the Picture Size and Position ......................................................................... E-18
Correcting the Vertical Keystone Distortion ................................................................... E-19
Optimizing RGB Picture Automatically .......................................................................... E-20
Turning Up or Down Volume ......................................................................................... E-20
Turning off the Projector ............................................................................................... E-20

CONVENIENT FEATURES ................................................... E-21


Using the Remote Mouse Function ............................................................................... E-21
Connecting to your computer for the remote mouse function ................................... E-21
When using the USB Port .......................................................................................... E-21
Switching operation mode between computer and projector ..................................... E-21
Turning Off the Image and Sound .................................................................................. E-22
Freezing a Picture .......................................................................................................... E-22
Enlarging and Moving a Picture ..................................................................................... E-22
Getting the Information ................................................................................................. E-22

USING ON-SCREEN MENU ................................................. E-23


Basic Menu Operation ................................................................................................... E-23
Using the Menus ....................................................................................................... E-23
List of Menu Items ........................................................................................................ E-24
Menu Elements ............................................................................................................. E-25
Menu Descriptions & Functions .................................................................................... E-26
Picture ....................................................................................................................... E-26
Brightness/Contrast/Sharpness/Color/Hue ............................................................ E-26
Picture Management .............................................................................................. E-26
Image ........................................................................................................................ E-26
Enabling Auto Keystone <Auto Keystone> ............................................................. E-26
Correcting Vertical Keystone Distortion Manually <Keystone> .............................. E-26
Saving Vertical Keystone Correction <Keystone Save> .......................................... E-26
Selecting Aspect Ratio [Aspect Ratio] ................................................................... E-27
Adjusting the Vertical Position of Image [Cinema Position](for Cinema only) ....... E-27
Setup ......................................................................................................................... E-27
Selecting Lamp Mode [Lamp Mode] ...................................................................... E-27
Selecting Menu Language [Language] ................................................................... E-27
Selecting Menu Color [Menu Color Select] ............................................................ E-27
Selecting Menu Display Time [Menu Display Time] ............................................... E-27
Selecting a Color or Logo for Background [Background] ...................................... E-27
Selecting Projector Orientation [Orientation] ......................................................... E-27
Advanced ................................................................................................................... E-27
Disabling the Cabinet Buttons [Control Panel Key Lock] ........................................ E-27
Enabling Power Management [Power Management] ............................................. E-27
Enabling High Speed Fan Mode [High Speed Fan Mode] ....................................... E-27
Selecting Signal Format [Signal Select] ................................................................. E-28
Page2 .................................................................................................................... E-28
Selecting Noise Reduction Level (not available for RGB) ....................................... E-28
Enabling Auto Adjust [Auto Adjust] ....................................................................... E-28
Adjusting Position/Clock (when Auto Adjust is off) ............................................... E-28
Information ................................................................................................................ E-28
Default ....................................................................................................................... E-29

MAINTENANCE ............................................................. E-30


Replacing the Lamp ...................................................................................................... E-30
Cleaning ........................................................................................................................ E-31
Cleaning or Replacing the Filter ................................................................................. E-31
Cleaning the Cabinet and the Lens ............................................................................. E-31

E-4
INTRODUCTION
Introduction to the Projector About this user's manual
This section introduces you to your new VT660/VT560/VT460 Projector The fastest way to get started is to take your time and do ev-
and describes the features and controls. erything right the first time. Take a few minutes now to review
the user's manual. This may save you time later on. At the
Congratulations on Your Purchase of The VT660/VT560/ beginning of each section of the manual you'll find an over-
VT460 Projector view. If the section doesn't apply, you can skip it.
The VT660/VT560/VT460 is one of the very best projectors available IBM is a trademark or registered trademark of International Business
today. The VT660/VT560/VT460 enables you to project precise images Machines Corporation.
up to 300 inches across (measured diagonally) from your PC or
Macintosh computer (desktop or notebook), VCR, DVD player, docu- Mac and PowerBook are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., regis-
ment camera, or a laser disc player. tered in the U.S. and other countries.
You can use the projector on a tabletop or cart, you can use the projec- Windows, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows XP or Windows 2000
tor to project images from behind the screen, and the projector can be are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
permanently mounted on a ceiling*1. The remote control can be used
Other product and company names mentioned in this users manual
wirelessly.
may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
holders.
*1 Do not attempt to mount the projector on a ceiling yourself.
The projector must be installed by qualified technicians in order
to ensure proper operation and reduce the risk of bodily injury.
In addition, the ceiling must be strong enough to support the pro-
jector and the installation must be in accordance with any local
building codes. Please consult your dealer for more information.

Features you'll enjoy:


Auto vertical keystone correction up to +/- 30 degrees
Low level noise
Short focal length lens
200W lamp (160W Eco mode)
Direct keys for source selection
New Color Management system
New menu design improves operability
NECs exclusive Advanced AccuBlend intelligent pixel blending tech-
nology - an extremely accurate image compression technology - of-
fers a crisp image with UXGA (16001200) resolution*2.
Supports most IBM VGA, SVGA, XGA , SXGA/UXGA(with Advanced
AccuBlend)*2, Macintosh, component signal (YCbCr/ YPbPr) or any
other RGB signals within a horizontal frequency range of 24 to 100
kHz and a vertical frequency range of 50 to 120 Hz. This includes
NTSC, PAL, PAL-N, PAL-M, PAL60, SECAM and NTSC4.43 stan-
dard video signals.
*2 A UXGA (16001200) and SXGA image (12801024) are dis-
played with NECs Advanced AccuBlend on VT660 and VT560.
A UXGA (16001200), SXGA (12801024) and XGA
(1024768) image are displayed with NECs Advanced
AccuBlend on VT460.
NOTE: Composite video standards are as follows:
NTSC: U.S. TV standard for video in U.S. and Canada.
PAL: TV standard used in Western Europe.
PAL-N: TV standard used in Argentine, Paraguay and Uruguay.
PAL-M: TV standard used in Brazil.
PAL60: TV standard used for NTSC playback on PAL TVs.
SECAM: TV standard used in France and Eastern Europe.
NTSC4.43: TV standard used in Middle East countries.

The supplied remote control can be used without a cable, and you
can even use the remote control to operate your PC's mouse
wirelessly from across the room with the built-in remote mouse func-
tion.
You can control the projector with a PC using the PC Control port.
The contemporary cabinet design is light, compact, easy to carry,
and complements any office, boardroom or auditorium.

E-5
Part Names of the Projector
Controls (See page E-7)
Monaural Speaker (1W)

Zoom Lever
Lamp Cover (See page E-30)
Focus Ring
Lamp Cover Screw
Lens

Ventilation (outlet) Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever


Heated air is exhausted from here (See page E-18)

Adjustable Tilt Foot


Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever (See page E-18)
(See page E-18)
Lens Cap
Adjustable Tilt Foot (See page E-18) Remote Sensor (See page E-10)

Remote Sensor
(See page E-10)
Ventilation (inlet) / Filter Cover (inlet)

Built-in Security Slot ( )*

AC Input
Main Power Switch Connect the supplied power cable's two-
When you plug the supplied power cable into pin plug here, and plug the other end into
an active wall outlet and turn on the Main an active wall outlet. (See page E-16)
Power switch, the POWER indicator turns
orange and the projector is in standby mode.
(See page E-17)

* This security slot supports the MicroSaver Security System. MicroSaver is a registered trademark of Kensington Microware Inc. The logo is
trademarked and owned by Kensington Microware Inc.

Attaching the lens cap Attaching the supplied carrying handle


To attach the lens cap to the bottom with the supplied string and rivet: You can carry the projector by attaching the supplied carrying handle
securely to the projector.
1. Thread the string through the hole on the lens cap and then tie a knot To attach the supplied carrying handle, use the supplied flathead screw-
in the string. driver and two screws.

2. Use the rivet to attach the


string to the bottom of the
projector.

CAUTION:
When carrying the projector by the carrying handle, make sure the
two screws that attach the carrying handle to the projector cabinet
are tight.

E-6
Top Features 12. ENTER Button
Executes your menu selection and activates items selected from the
5 6 78 234 10 11 menu.

13. CANCEL Button


Pressing this button will return to the previous menu.
While you are in the main menu, pressing this button will close the
menu.

9 1 12 13

1. POWER Button (ON / STAND BY)( )


Use this button to turn the power on and off when the main power is
supplied and the projector is in standby mode.
To turn on the projector, press and hold this button for a minimum of
two seconds. To turn off the projector, press this button twice.

2. POWER Indicator
When this indicator is green, the projector is on; when this indicator
is orange, it is in standby mode. See the Power Indicator section on
page E-32 for more details.

3. STATUS Indicator
If this light blinks red rapidly, it indicates that an error has occurred,
the lamp cover is not attached properly or the projector has over-
heated. If this light remains orange, it indicates that you have pressed
a cabinet key while the Control Panel Key Lock is enabled. See the
Status Indicator section on page E-32 for more details.

4. LAMP Indicator
If this light blinks red rapidly, it's warning you that the lamp has reached
the end of its usable life. After this light appears, replace the lamp as
soon as possible (See page E-30). If this is lit green continually, it
indicates that the lamp mode is set to Eco. See the Lamp Indicator
section on page E-32 for more details.

5. VIDEO Button
Press this button to select a video source from a VCR, DVD player,
laser disc player or document camera.

6. S-VIDEO Button
Press this button to select an S-Video source from a VCR.

7. RGB Button
Press this button to select an RGB source from computer or compo-
nent equipment connected to your RGB port.

8. AUTO ADJ. Button


Use this button to adjust Position-H/V and Pixel Clock/Phase for an
optimal picture (See page E-20).

9. Source Indicators
When one of the RGB, VIDEO or S-VIDEO input is selected, the
corresponding source indicator lights.

10. MENU Button


Displays the menu.

11. SELECT GHFE / Volume Buttons


GH : Use these buttons to select the menu of the item you wish to
adjust.
FE : Use these buttons to change the level of a selected menu item.
A press of the E button executes the selection. When no menus
appear, these buttons work as a volume control.
When an image is magnified, the SELECT GHFE button moves the
image.

E-7
Terminal Panel Features

2 1 7 8

6 5 4 3

1. RGB IN / Component Input Connector (Mini D-Sub 15 Pin)


Connect your computer or other analog RGB equipment such as IBM
compatible or Macintosh computers. Use the supplied RGB cable to
connect to your computer. This also serves as a component input
connector that allows you to connect a component video output of
component equipment such as a DVD player. This connector also
supports SCART output signal. See page E-14 for more details.
2. RGB AUDIO Input Mini Jack (Stereo Mini)
This is where you connect the audio output from your computer or
DVD player when connected to the RGB input. A commercially avail-
able audio cable is required.

3. RGB OUT Connector (Mini D-Sub 15 Pin)


You can use this connector to loop your computer image to an exter-
nal monitor from the RGB input source.
This connector outputs RGB signal in standby mode.

4. AUDIO OUT Mini Jack (Stereo Mini)


You can use this jack to output sound from the currently selected
source (RGB, VIDEO or S-VIDEO). Output sound level can be ad-
justed in accordance with the sound level of the internal speaker.

5. S-VIDEO IN Connector (Mini DIN 4 Pin)


Here is where you connect the S-Video input from an external source
like a VCR.
NOTE: S-Video provides more vivid color and higher resolution than the tra-
ditional composite video format.

S-VIDEO AUDIO Input Jacks R/L (RCA)


These are your left and right channel audio inputs for stereo sound
from an S-Video source.

6. VIDEO IN Connector (RCA)


Connect a VCR, DVD player, laser disc player, or document camera
here to project video.

VIDEO AUDIO Input Jacks R/L (RCA)


These are your left and right channel audio inputs for stereo sound
from a Video source.

7. USB (PC) Port (Type B)


Connect this port to the USB port (type A) of your PC using the sup-
plied USB cable. You can operate your computer's mouse functions
from the remote control.

8. PC CONTROL Port (DIN 8 Pin)


For service personnel only.

E-8
Part Names of the Remote Control 9. MENU Button
Displays the menu for various settings and adjustments.
NOTE: If you are using a Macintosh computer, you can click either the CANCEL
(right-click) or ENTER (left-click) button to activate the mouse. 10. SELECT GHFE (Mouse) Button
When you are in the Computer mode, these buttons work as a com-
puter mouse.
1 When you are in the Projector mode, which is indicated by lighting
the PJ button. See page E-21.
2 GH : Use these buttons to select the menu of the item you wish
OFF ON
to adjust.
4 POWER 3 FE : Use these buttons to change the level of a selected menu
VIDEO AUTO ADJ. item. A press of the E button executes the selection. When
5 S-VIDEO RGB 8 no menus appear, these buttons work as a volume control.
When an image is magnified, the SELECT GHFE button moves the
6 7 image.
MENU
9 11. ENTER (Left Click) Button
When you are in the Computer mode, this button works as the mouse
left button. When this button is pressed and held for a minimum of 2
10 SELECT seconds, the drag mode is set. When you are in the Projector mode,
which is indicated by lighting the PJ button: Use this button to enter
your menu selection. It works the same way as the ENTER button on
11 NT
L

E
12
E

ER NC the cabinet. See page E-7.


CA

PJ 12. CANCEL (Right Click) Button


When you are in the Computer mode, this button works as the mouse
13 right button. When you are in the Projector mode, which is indicated
by lighting the PJ button: It works the same way as the CANCEL
PICTURE ASPECT
button on the cabinet. See page E-7.
14 15
HELP FREEZE PIC-MUTE
16 18 13. PJ Button
MAGNIFY Press this button to switch the SELECT, CANCEL, and ENTER but-
19 17 tons between the Projector mode (lit red) and the Computer mode.
Press this button or any one of the POWER ON/OFF, MENU, AS-
PECT, HELP, MAGNIFY, buttons to switch to the Projector mode and
VOLUME
the PJ button lights red. To switch back to the Computer mode, press
the PJ button again. See page E-21.
20
14. PICTURE Button
Press this button to display the Picture adjustement screen such as
Brightness, Contrast, Sharpness, Color and Hue. See page E-26.

1. Infrared Transmitter 15. ASPECT Button


Direct the remote control toward the remote sensor on the projector Press this button to display the Aspect Ratio select screen. See page
cabinet. E-27.

2. LED 16. HELP Button


Flashes when any button is pressed. Provides the set information.

3. POWER ON Button 17. FREEZE Button


When the main power is on, you can use this button to turn your This button will freeze a picture. Press again to resume motion.
projector on.
18. PIC-MUTE Button
NOTE: To turn on the projector, press and hold the POWER ON button for a This button turns off the image and sound for a short period of time.
minimum of two seconds. Press again to restore the image and sound.

4. POWER OFF Button


You can use this button to turn your projector off. 19. MAGNIFY (+)() Button
Use this button to adjust the image size up to 400%.
NOTE: To turn off the projector, press the POWER OFF button twice. The image is magnified about the center of the screen. See page E-
22.
5. VIDEO Button
Press this button to select a video source from a VCR, DVD player, 20. VOLUME (+)() Button
laser disc player or document camera. Press (+) to increase the volume and () to decrease it.

6. S-VIDEO Button
NOTE: The default is the Computer mode, which allows you to use the SELECT,
Press this button to select an S-Video source from a VCR.
CANCEL, and ENTER buttons as your computer mouse. When the POWER ON/
OFF, MENU, ASPECT, HELP, or MAGNIFY button is pressed, the PJ button lights
7. RGB Button
red to indicate that you are in the Projector mode. If no buttons are pressed
Press this button to select RGB input.
within 60 seconds, the light goes out and the Projector mode is canceled.
8. AUTO ADJ. Button
Use this button to adjust an RGB source for an optimal picture.
See page E-20.

E-9
Battery Installation Remote Control Precautions
1. Press firmly and slide the battery cover off. Handle the remote control carefully.
If the remote control gets wet, wipe it dry immediately.
Avoid excessive heat and humidity.
If you will not be using the remote control for a long time, remove the
batteries.
Do not place the batteries upside down.
Do not use new and old batteries together, or use different types of
batteries together

2. Remove both old batteries and install new ones (AA). Ensure that Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control
you have the batteries' polarity (+/-) aligned correctly.

7m/22 feet
7m/22 feet

30
30
30
30

3. Slip the cover back over the batteries until it snaps into place. Do not
mix different types of batteries or new and old batteries. Remote sensor on
Remote control
projector cabinet

The infrared signal operates by line-of-sight up to a distance of about


22 feet/7 m and within a 60-degree angle of the remote sensor on the
projector cabinet.
The projector will not respond if there are objects between the re-
mote control and the sensor, or if strong light falls on the sensor.
Weak batteries will also prevent the remote control from properly
operating the projector.

Note on Remote Control Operation:


If you press and hold the SELECT GHFE button while installing new
batteries, the remote control may fail to work properly.
Should this happen, remove the batteries and then install them again
without touching the SELECT button.

E-10
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
This section describes how to set up your projector and how to connect video and audio sources.

Your projector is simple to set up and use.


1 But before you get started, you must first:

1 Set up a screen and the projector.


2 Connect your computer or video equip-
ment to the projector. See page
E-13 16.
3 Connect the supplied power cable. See
page E-16.

2 NOTE: Ensure that the power cable and any


other cables are disconnected before moving
the projector. When moving the projector or
when it is not in use, cover the lens with the
lens cap.

To the wall outlet.

Setting Up the Screen and the Projector


Selecting a Location
The further your projector is from the screen or wall, the larger the image. The minimum size the image can be is approximately 21" (0.53 m)
measured diagonally when the projector is roughly 27.6 inches (0.7 m) from the wall or screen. The largest the image can be is 300" (7.6 m) when
the projector is about 393.7 inches (10 m) from the wall or screen. Use the drawing below as a guide.

Scr
609 een s
.6(W iz
)X4 e (Un
57.2 i
487 (H) t: cm
/24
.7(W 0(W /inch)
)X3 )X1
65.8 80(
406 (H) H)
.4(W /19 Screen Size
)X3 2(W
04.8 )X1
365 (H) 44(
/16 H)
.8(W 0(W 300
)X2 )X1 "
74.3 20(
(H) H )
/14
4(W 2 40"
304 )X1
.8(W 08(
)X2 H)
28.6 200
(H) "
/12
0(W
243 )X9 180
.8(W 0(H
)X1 ) "
82.9
203 (H)
/96
.2(W (W)
)X1 X72
52.4 (H) 150
(H) "
162 /80
.6(W ( W)X
)X1 60(
21.9 H )
(H) 120
121 /64 "
.9(W (W)
)X9 X48
1.4( ( H)
H)/4 1 00"
81.3 8(W
(W) )X3
X61 6(H
61.0 . 0(H ) 80"
(W) )/32
X45 (W)
50.8 .7(H X24
(W) )/24 ( H )
X38 (W) 60"
.1(H X18
42.7 )/20 (H)
(W)
(W) X15 40"
X32 (H)
(H)/ 3
17(W
)X13 25" 0"
Len (H) 21"
sc
ent
0.8 .6"

er
/27
0.7

1.0 5" .
1. 9.4"
/31

2. "
.7
2. "

3"
.2
/3

78

6.
51

9"
0/

"
10

3.

.2
3/

5"

"
8"
13

.8
0
7/

10 .9"
7.

24

"
0.

.6
4/

15

18
26
20

1/

97
3.

0/

/3
7/
1/

6.

/3
4.

1
6.
5.

.1
)8.
ch
/in
m
t:
ni
(U
ce
n
ta
is
D

E-11
Throw Distance and Screen Size
The following shows the proper relative positions of the projector and screen. Refer to the table to determine the position of installation.

Distance Chart

Screen Width B = Vertical distance between lens center and screen center
C = Throw distance
D = Vertical distance between lens center and top of screen (bottom of
screen for desktop)
= Throw angle
Screen Diagonal

NOTE: Distances may vary +/-5%.


Screen Height Screen center

(B)

(D) Screen Bottom

Lens Center

Throw Angle ()

Throw Distance (C)

Screen Size B C D Screen Size B C D


Diagonal Width Height Wide Tele Wide Tele Diagonal Width Height Wide Tele Wide Tele
inch inch inch inch inch inch degree mm mm mm mm mm mm degree
21 17 13 5 - 29 1 - 10.0 533 427 320 130 - 740 30 - 10.0
25 20 15 6 29 - 35 1 11.8 - 9.9 635 508 381 150 740 - 880 40 11.8 - 9.9
30 24 18 7 35 - 42 2 11.7 - 9.8 762 610 457 180 890 - 1070 40 11.7 - 9.8
40 32 24 10 47 - 57 2 11.6 - 9.7 1016 813 610 250 1200 - 1440 60 11.6 - 9.7
60 48 36 15 71 - 86 3 11.5 - 9.6 1524 1219 914 370 1810 - 2180 90 11.5 - 9.6
72 58 43 17 86 - 103 4 11.4 - 9.6 1829 1463 1097 440 2180 - 2620 110 11.4 - 9.6
80 64 48 19 96 - 115 5 11.4 - 9.6 2032 1626 1219 490 2430 - 2920 120 11.4 - 9.6
84 67 50 20 101 - 121 5 11.4 - 9.6 2134 1707 1280 520 2550 - 3060 120 11.4 - 9.6
90 72 54 22 108 - 129 5 11.4 - 9.5 2286 1829 1372 550 2740 - 3290 130 11.4 - 9.5
100 80 60 24 120 - 144 6 11.4 - 9.5 2540 2032 1524 610 3050 - 3660 150 11.4 - 9.5
120 96 72 29 144 - 173 7 11.4 - 9.5 3048 2438 1829 740 3660 - 4400 180 11.4 - 9.5
150 120 90 36 181 - 217 9 11.4 - 9.5 3810 3048 2286 920 4590 - 5510 220 11.4 - 9.5
180 144 108 44 217 - 260 10 11.3 - 9.5 4572 3658 2743 1110 5510 - 6610 270 11.3 - 9.5
200 160 120 48 241 - 290 12 11.3 - 9.5 5080 4064 3048 1230 6130 - 7350 300 11.3 - 9.5
210 168 126 51 253 - 304 12 11.3 - 9.5 5334 4267 3200 1290 6440 - 7720 310 11.3 - 9.5
240 192 144 58 290 - 348 14 11.3 - 9.5 6096 4877 3658 1470 7360 - 8830 350 11.3 - 9.5
270 216 162 65 326 - 391 16 11.3 - 9.5 6858 5486 4115 1660 8290 - 9940 400 11.3 - 9.5
300 240 180 73 363 - 400 17 11.3 - 9.5 7620 6096 4572 1840 9210 -11050 440 11.3 - 9.5

WARNING Reflecting the Image


* Installing your projector on the ceiling must be done by a quali-
Using a mirror to reflect your projector's image enables you to enjoy a
fied technician. Contact your NEC dealer for more information.
much larger image. Contact your NEC dealer if you need a mirror. If
* Do not attempt to install the projector yourself. you're using a mirror and your image is inverted, use the MENU and
Only use your projector on a solid, level surface. If the projector falls SELECT buttons on your projector cabinet or your remote control to
to the ground, you can be injured and the projector severely dam- correct the orientation. (See page E-27.)
aged.
Do not use the projector where temperatures vary greatly. The pro-
jector must be used at temperatures between 32F (0C) and 95F
(35C).
Do not expose the projector to moisture, dust, or smoke. This will
harm the screen image.
Ensure that you have adequate ventilation around your projector so
heat can dissipate. Do not cover the vents on the side or the front of
the projector.

E-12
Making Connections
NOTE: When using with a notebook PC, be sure to connect between the projector and the notebook PC before turning on the power to the notebook PC. In most
cases signal cannot be output from RGB output unless the notebook PC is turned on after connecting with the projector.
* If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computer's screen-saver or power management software.
* If you accidentally hit the POWER button on the remote control, wait 60 seconds and then press the POWER button again to resume.

Connecting Your PC or Macintosh Computer

RGB signal cable (supplied)


To mini D-Sub 15-pin connector on the pro-
jector. It is recommended that you use a
Audio cable (not supplied) commercially available distribution amplifier
if connecting a signal cable longer than the
supplied one.
IBM PC or Compatibles (Desktop type)
or Macintosh (Desktop type)

PHONE

NOTE: For older Macintosh, PHONE

use a commercially available


pin adapter (not supplied) to
connect to your Mac's video IBM VGA or Compatibles (Notebook type)
port. or Macintosh (Notebook type)

Connecting your PC or Macintosh computer to your projector will en-


able you to project your computer's screen image for an impressive pre-
sentation.
To connect to a PC or Macintosh, simply:

1. Turn off the power to your projector and computer.


2. Use the supplied signal cable to connect your PC or Macintosh to the
projector.
3. Turn on the projector and the computer.
4. If the projector goes blank after a period of inactivity, it may be caused
by a screen saver installed on the computer you've connected to the
projector.

E-13
To connect SCART output (RGB)
Before connections: An exclusive SCART adapter (ADP-SC1) and a 1. Turn off the power to the projector and your video equipment.
commercially available SCART cable are required for this connection. 2. Use the NEC ADP-SC1 SCART adapter and a commercially avail-
able SCART cable to connect the RGB input of your projector and a
NOTE: Audio signal is not available for this connection. SCART output (RGB) of your video equipment.
3. Turn on the power to the projector and your video equipment.
4. Use the RGB button on the remote control to select the RGB input.
RGB IN Projector
Video equipment 5. Press the MENU button on the remote control to display the menu.
such as DVD player 6. From the menu, select [Advanced] [Signal Select RGB] [Scart].
SCART is a standard European audio-visual connector for TVs, VCRs
and DVD players. It is also referred to as Euro-connector.

NOTE: The ADP-SC1 SCART adapter is obtainable from your NEC dealer in Eu-
rope. Contact your NEC dealer in Europe for more information.
To RGB IN

Commercially available Female ADP-SC1


SCART cable

Connecting an External Monitor

Audio cable (not supplied)

LINE IN
PHONE

RGB signal cable (supplied)

RGB signal cable (not supplied)

You can connect a separate, external monitor to your projector to simul- NOTE:
taneously view on a monitor the RGB analog image you're projecting. The RGB OUT connector outputs RGB signal during standby mode. When the
To do so: projector goes into standby mode, the image on an external monitor disap-
pears for a moment.
1. Turn off the power to your projector, monitor and computer. When the projector is in the standby mode, the image may not be correctly
2. Use a 15-pin cable to connect your monitor to the RGB OUT (Mini D- displayed while the cooling fans are running immediately after turning on or
Sub 15 pin) connector on your projector. off the power.
3. Turn on the projector, monitor and the computer. Daisy chain connection is not possible.

E-14
Connecting Your DVD Player

RGB IN

Optional 15-pin-to-RCA
(female)3 cable (ADP-CV1)

Component video RCA3 cable


(not supplied)

Audio Equipment
DVD player
AUDIO IN
L R AUDIO OUT Component
L R Y Cb Cr

Audio cable
(not supplied)

You can connect your projector to a DVD player with component output For a DVD player without component video (Y,Cb,Cr) output, use
or Video output. To do so, simply: common RCA cables (not provided) to connect a composite VIDEO
output of the DVD player to the Video Input of the projector.
1. Turn off the power to your projector and DVD player. 3. Turn on the projector and DVD player.
2. If your DVD player has the component video (Y,Cb,Cr) output, use a
commercially available component video cable (RCAX3) and the op- NOTE: Refer to your DVD player's owner's manual for more information about
tional 15-pin-to-RCA (female)3 cable to connect your DVD player your DVD player's video output requirements,
to the RGB IN connector on the projector.

E-15
Connecting Your VCR or Laser Disc Player

Video cable (not supplied) S-Video cable (not supplied)

Audio equipment

VCR/ Laser disc player


AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT L R
L R

S-VIDEO OUT Audio cable


(not supplied)
VIDEO OUT

Use common RCA cables (not provided) to connect your VCR, laser NOTE: Refer to your VCR or laser disc player owner's manual for more informa-
disc player or document camera to your projector. tion about your equipment's video output requirements.
To make these connections, simply:
NOTE: An image may not be displayed correctly when a Video or S-Video source
1. Turn off the power to the projector and VCR, laser disc player or is played back in fast-forward or fast-rewind via a scan converter.
document camera.
2. Connect one end of your RCA cable to the video output connector on
the back of your VCR or laser disc player, connect the other end to
the Video input on your projector. Use an audio cable (not supplied)
to connect the audio from your VCR or laser disc player to your audio
equipment (if your VCR or laser disc player has this capability). Be
careful to keep your right and left channel connections correct for
stereo sound.
3. Turn on the projector and the VCR or laser disc player.

Connecting the Supplied Power Cable


Connect the supplied power cable to the projector.
First connect the supplied power cable's two-pin plug to
the AC IN of the projector, and then connect the other
plug of the supplied power cable in the wall outlet.

E-16
PROJECTING AN IMAGE (BASIC OPERATION)
This section describes how to turn on the projector and to project a 2. Press the ENTER button to execute the selection.
picture onto the screen.

Turning on the Projector


NOTE:
The projector has two power switches: main power switch and POWER button
(POWER ON and OFF on the remote control)
When plugging in or unplugging the supplied power cable, make sure that the
main power switch is pushed to the off[O] position. Failure to do so may cause
damage to the projector.

To turn on the main power to the projector, press the Main Power switch
to the ON position ( I ).

After this has been done, you can proceed to the menu operation.
If you want, you can select the menu language later. See "Language"
on page E-27.

NOTE: Immediately after turning on the projector, screen flicker may occur. This
is not a fault. Wait 3 to 5 minutes until the lamp lighting is stabilized.

When the Lamp mode is set to Eco, the Lamp indicator will light green.
Before you turn on your projector, ensure that the computer or video If one of the following things happens, the projector will not turn on.
source is turned on and that your lens cap is removed.
Only after you press the ON/STAND BY button on the projector cabinet * If the internal temperature of the projector is too high, the projector
or POWER ON button on the remote control for a minimum of 2 sec- detects abnormal high temperature. In this condition the projector
onds will the power indicator turn to green and the projector become will not turn on to protect the internal system. If this happens, wait for
ready to use. the projector's internal components to cool down.
* When the lamp reaches its end of usable life, the projector will not
turn on. If this happens, replace the lamp.
* If the lamp fails to light, and if the STATUS indicator flashes on and
off in a cycle of six times, wait a full minute and then turn on the
power.

Note on Startup screen (Menu Language Select screen)


When you first turn on the projector, you will get the Startup screen. This
screen gives you the opportunity to select one of the seven menu lan-
guages: English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Swedish and Japa-
nese.
To select a menu language, follow these steps:

1. Use the SELECT G or H button to select one of the seven languages


for the menu.

E-17
Selecting a Source Adjusting the Picture Size and Position
Place your projector on a flat level surface and ensure that the projector
Selecting the computer or video source is square to the screen.
Using the Remote Control
Lift the front edge of the projector to center the image vertically.
OFF ON
* If the projected image does not appear square to the screen then
VIDEO
POWER

AUTO ADJ.
use the Keystone feature for proper adjustment. See page E-19.
S-VIDEO RGB

MENU

SELECT Press any one of the RGB, VIDEO or


S-VIDEO buttons.
NT
L

E
E

ER C
C AN

PJ

PICTURE ASPECT

HELP FREEZE PIC-MUTE

MAGNIFY

VOLUME

Move the projector left to center the image horizontally on the screen.
Using the cabinet buttons

Press any one of the RGB,


VIDEO or S-VIDEO buttons.

NOTE: If no input signal is available, the projector will display a blue background
(factory preset).

Adjust the Tilt Foot


1. Lift the front edge of the projector.

Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever


Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever
Adjustable Tilt Foot

2. Push up the Adjustable Tilt Foot Levers on the right and left sides of
the projector to extend the adjustable tilt feet (maximum height).
3. Push down the Adjustable Tilt Foot Levers.

4. Lower the front of the projector to the desired height (max. 40mm/
1.6) and release the Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever to lock the Adjust-
able tilt foot. There is approximately 10 degrees of up and down ad-
justment for the front of the projector.

E-18
CAUTION: 2. Turn off the Auto Keystone function.
Do not use the tilt-foot for purposes other than originally intended.
Misuses such as gripping the tilt-foot or hanging on the wall can
cause damage to the projector.

Zoom
Use the ZOOM lever to finely adjust the image size on the screen.

Use the SELECT H button to select Image and then press the
SELECT E button. The Auto Keystone will be displayed. Press the
SELECT E to select Off.

You can use the ZOOM lever to enlarge or reduce an image size.

Focus
Use the FOCUS ring to obtain the best focus.

3. Select the Keystone function.

Correcting the Vertical Keystone Distortion


Auto Keystone Correction Use the SELECT H button to select Keystone.
The Auto Keystone correction feature will correct the vertical distortion
of a projected image on the screen. No special operation required. Just
put the projector on a flat surface.
Note that the vertical keystone angle can be corrected between 30 de-
grees upward and 30 degrees downward of projector tilt from level.

4. Correct the vertical distortion.


NOTE: Keystone correction angle could be less than 30 degrees for some sig- Use the SELECT F or E button to correct the vertical keystone dis-
nals that have a high resolution or frequency such as UXGA. tortion.

Manual Keystone Correction


You can also correct the vertical keystone distortion manually.
To do so:
1. Press the MENU button.
The menu will be displayed.

5. Press the MENU button to close the menu.

NOTE: You can save the changes using the Keystone Save feature when you turn
off the projector.

E-19
Optimizing RGB Picture Automatically Turning off the Projector
OFF ON
POWER

Adjusting the Image Using Auto Adjust To turn off the projector: VIDEO AUTO ADJ.
S-VIDEO RGB

Optimizing RGB image automatically First, press the POWER (ON/STAND BY) but-
Press the Auto Adjust button to optimize an RGB image automatically. ton on the projector cabinet or the POWER OFF MENU

button on the remote control. The Power Off /


[Poor picture] SELECT
Are you sure? message will appear.
NT

L
E

E
ER NC
CA

PJ

PICTURE ASPECT

AUTO ADJ. HELP FREEZE PIC-MUTE

MAGNIFY

Secondly, press the ENTER button or press VOLUME

the POWER (ON/STAND BY) or the POWER


OFF button again.
The power indicator will glow orange. After the
[Normal picture] projector turns off, the cooling fans keep op-
erating for 60 seconds (Cooling-off time).
Lastly, turn off the Main Power switch. The
power indicator will go out. Last unplug the
power cable.

CAUTION
Do not unplug the power cable from the
wall outlet or do not turn off the main power
under any one of the following circum-
stances. Doing so can cause damage to
Press the Auto Adjust button to fine-tune the computer image or to re- the projector:
move any vertical banding that might appear and to reduce video noise, While the Hour Glass icon appears.
dot interference or cross talk (this is evident when part of your image While the cooling fans are running. (The
appears to be shimmering). This function adjusts the clock frequencies cooling fans continue to work for 60 sec-
that eliminate the horizontal banding in the image. This function also onds after the projector is turned off).
adjusts the clock phase to reduce video noise, dot interference or cross
talk. (This is evident when part of your image appears to be shimmer-
ing.)
This adjustment may be necessary when you connect your computer
for the first time.

NOTE:
Some signals may not be displayed correctly or take time.
The Auto Adjust function does not work for component and video signal.
If the Auto Adjust operation cannot optimize the RGB signal, try to adjust Clock
and Phase manually. See page E-28.

Turning Up or Down Volume


Sound level from the speaker and the AUDIO OUT jack (Stereo mini)
on the projector can be adjusted.

VOLUME

increase volume

decrease volume

E-20
CONVENIENT FEATURES
Using the Remote Mouse Function When using the USB Port
The remote mouse function can only be used with a Windows 98, Win-
The built-in remote mouse function enables you to operate your dows Me, Windows XP, Windows 2000 or Mac OS operating system.
computer's mouse functions from the remote control (Computer mode).
It is a great convenience for clicking through your computer-generated
presentations. To return to the projector operation mode (Projector mode), USB port (PC)
press the PJ button (lit red).

Connecting to your computer for the remote mouse


function
If you wish to use the remote mouse function, use the supplied USB
cable to connect the USB port (PC) of the projector and the USB port
(type A) of your computer. USB cable
(supplied)
USB port
NOTE: Depending on the type of connection or OS installed on your computer, (Type A)
you may have to restart your computer or change your computer settings.

NOTE: Wait at least 5 seconds after disconnecting the USB cable before recon-
necting it and vice versa. The computer may not identify the built-in mouse re-
ceiver if it is repeatedly connected and disconnected in rapid intervals.

Switching operation mode between computer and projector


The three shaded buttons shown on the drawing work as a computer mouse in the Computer mode.
In the Computer mode the PJ button is not lit.

Works as a mouse for your computer. Works as the SELECT button on the projector.

OFF ON OFF ON
POWER POWER

VIDEO AUTO ADJ. VIDEO AUTO ADJ.


S-VIDEO RGB S-VIDEO RGB

MENU
Works as a right-click button MENU Works as the CANCEL
for your computer. button on the projector.
SELECT SELECT

NT NT
L

E E
E

ER NC ER NC
CA CA

PJ PJ

Not lit Lit red


PICTURE ASPECT PICTURE ASPECT

HELP FREEZE PIC-MUTE


Works as the ENTER HELP FREEZE PIC-MUTE

MAGNIFY
button on the projector. MAGNIFY

Works as a left-click
button for your com- VOLUME VOLUME

puter.

When the MENU button is pressed, the PJ button lights red to indicate that you are in the Projector mode, which allows the projector menu
operation using the three buttons.
If no buttons are pressed within 60 seconds, the PJ button's light goes out to indicate that you are in the Computer mode. To enable the projector
menu operation again, press the PJ button to light red.
When the PJ button is lit, if you want to use the mouse function immediately, press the PJ button to return to the Computer mode (not lit).

During Computer mode:


In Computer mode, by pressing the ENTER button for 2 seconds or more then releasing, the drag mode is set and the drag operation can be
performed simply by pressing the SELECT GHFE (mouse) button. To drop the item, press the ENTER (left click) button again or press the
CANCEL (right click) button.

E-21
Turning Off the Image and Sound Getting the Information
Press the PIC-MUTE button to turn off the image and sound for a short You get the information about the signal and projector settings.
period of time. Press again to restore the image and sound.
HELP
PIC-MUTE

SELECT

Display Information
Freezing a Picture
Press the FREEZE button to freeze a picture. Press again to resume Exit Information
motion.
FREEZE

Enlarging and Moving a Picture


You can enlarge the picture up to 400 percent.
To do so:

1. Press the MAGNIFY (+) button to magnify the picture.


To move the magnified image, use the SELECT button.

MAGNIFY

SELECT

2. Return the image to the original size.

MAGNIFY

E-22
USING ON-SCREEN MENU
Basic Menu Operation 6. Repeat steps 2-5 to adjust an additional item, or press the MENU
button to close the menu.
Using the Menus
NOTE: The on-screen menu may not be displayed correctly while interlaced mo-
tion video image is projected.

1. Press the MENU button on the remote control or projector cabinet to


display the Menu.

2. Press the SELECT GH buttons on the remote control or the projec-


tor cabinet to highlight the menu for the item you want to adjust or
set.

3. Press the SELECT E button or the ENTER button on the remote


control or the projector cabinet to select a submenu or item.

4. Adjust the level or turn the selected item on or off by using SELECT
F or E buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet.
The on-screen slide bar will show you the amount of increase or
decrease.
5. Changes are stored until you adjust it again.
CANCEL ........ Return to the previous screen.

E-23
List of Menu Items
Picture
Brightness
Contrast
Sharpness
Color
Hue
Picture Management Presentation, Video, Movie, Graphic, sRGB
User
Base Setting Presentation, Video, Movie, Graphic, sRGB
White Balance Brightness R,G,B Contrast R,G,B
Gamma Correction Dynamic, Black Detail, Natural

Image
Auto Keystone On, Off
Keystone
Keystone Save On, Off
Aspect Ratio Normal, Wide Zoom, Cinema, Native
Cinema Position

Setup
Lamp Mode Normal, Eco
Language English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Swedish, Japanese
Menu Color Select Color, Monochrome
Menu Display Time Manual, Auto 5 sec, Auto 15sec, Auto 45 sec
Background Blue, Black, Logo
Orientation Desktop Front, Ceiling Rear, Desktop Rear, Ceiling Front

Advanced
Control Panel Key Lock Enable, Disable
Power Management On, Off
High Speed Fan Mode On, Off
Signal Select RGB RGB/Component, RGB, Component, Scart
Video Auto, NTSC3.58, NTSC4.43, PAL, PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL60, SECAM
S-Video Auto, NTSC3.58, NTSC4.43, PAL, PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL60, SECAM
Page2 Noise reduction Off, Low, High
Auto Adjust On, Off
Vertical
Horizontal
Clock
Phase

Information
Information (page1) Source Index, Horizontal Frequency, Vertical Frequency, Sync Polarity
Information (page2) Signal Type, Video Type, Sync Type, Interlace
Information (page3) Remaining Lamp Time, Lamp Hour Meter, Filter Usage, Projector Usage

Default
Factory Default Current Signal
Factory Default All Data
Clear Filter Usage
Clear Lamp Hour Meter

NOTE: Some menu items are not available depending on the input source.
E-24
Menu Elements

Title
Slide bar Radio button

Source
Highlight Check mark Solid triangle

Tab

Key symbol
Thermometer symbol

Menu windows or dialog boxes typically have the following elements:

Title .................... Indicates the menu title.


Highlight ............. Indicates the selected menu or item.
Source ................ Indicates the currently selected source.
Solid triangle ...... Indicates further choices are available. A highlighted
triangle indicates the item is active.
Tab ..................... Indicates a group of features in a dialog box. Select-
ing on any tab brings its page to the front.
Radio button ....... Use this round button to select an option in a dialog
box.
Check mark ........ Indicates the item is selected.
Slide bar ............. Indicates settings or the direction of adjustment.
Key symbol ........ Indicates the Control Panel Key Lock is enabled.
Thermometer symbol ... Indicates the lamp mode is forcibly set to Eco mode
because the internal temperature is too high.

E-25
Menu Descriptions & Functions User Adjust (when using User )
When selecting user adjustable presetting (User), the submenu will
be displayed.
Picture
You can customize each gamma or color. To do so, first select User
and press the ENTER button, and then proceed the following steps.

Selecting Base Setting


This feature allows you to use white balance or gamma values as
reference data to optimize for various types of images. You can se-
lect one of the following five settings.
Presentation
Video
Movie
Graphic
sRGB

Adjusting White Balance <White Balance>


Adjusting Brightness, Contrast, Sharpness, Color, Hue and Picture This allows you to adjust the white balance. Brightness for each color
Management. (RGB) is used to adjust the black level of the screen; Contrast for
each color (RGB) to adjust the white level of the screen.
Brightness ...... Adjusts the brightness level or the back raster inten-
sity. Selecting Gamma Correction Mode <Gamma>
Contrast ......... Adjusts the intensity of the image according to the Each mode is recommended for :
incoming signal. Dynamic ......... For true color reproduction of natural tones
Sharpness ..... Controls the detail of the image for Video. Black Detail .... For dark portions of a picture
Color .............. Increases or decreases the color saturation level (not Natural ........... Normal settings
valid for RGB).
Hue ................ Varies the color level from +/- green to +/-blue. The
red level is used as reference. This adjustment is only Image
valid for Video and Component inputs (not valid for
RGB).

Picture Management

Enabling Auto Keystone <Auto Keystone>


This feature allows the projector to detect its tilt and correct vertical
distortion automatically.
To turn on the Auto Keystone feature, select On.
This option allows you to adjust neutral tint for yellow, cyan or ma-
genta. Correcting Vertical Keystone Distortion Manually <Keystone>
There are 5 factory presets optimized for various types of images, or You can correct vertical distortion manually from the menu.
you can set user adjustable settings. You can save the changes using the Keystone Save feature when
you turn off the projector.
Presentation .. Recommended for making a presentation using a
PowerPoint file Saving Vertical Keystone Correction <Keystone Save>
Video ............. Recommended for regular picture such as TV pro- This option enables you to save your current keystone settings.
gram Saving your change once affects all sources. The changes are saved
when the projector is off.
Movie ............. Recommended for movie
Graphic .......... Recommended for graphics
sRGB ............. Standard color values
User ............... User adjustable

NOTE: When sRGB, Graphic, Video or Movie is selected, the bright-


ness decreases slightly when compared to Presentation. This is not a mal-
function.

E-26
Selecting Aspect Ratio [ Aspect Ratio] Selecting Lamp Mode [Lamp Mode]
Aspect Ratio allows you to select the best Aspect mode to display This feature enables you to select two brightness modes of the lamp:
your source image. You can also display the Aspect Ratio window by Normal and Eco modes. The lamp life can be extended by using the
pressing the ASPECT button on the remote control. (See page E-9). Eco mode.
When 4:3 is selected from the source (i.e. DVD player), the following Normal Mode ... This is the default setting (100% Brightness).
selections will display: Eco Mode ...... Select this mode to increase the lamp life (80% Bright-
Normal Wide Zoom Cinema Native ness).

NOTE: Thermometer symbol indicates the lamp mode is forcibly set to Eco
mode because the internal temperature is too high.

Selecting Menu Language [Language]


Standard Left and right Left and right You can choose one of seven languages for on-screen instructions.
4:3 Aspect stretched stretched The options are: English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Swed-
When 16:9 is selected from the source (i.e. DVD player), the follow- ish and Japanese.
ing selections will display:
Selecting Menu Color [Menu Color Select]
Normal Wide Zoom Cinema Native You can choose between two color modes for menu color: color and
monochrome.

Selecting Menu Display Time [Menu Display Time]


This option allows you to select how long the projector waits after the
last touch of a button to turn off the menu.
16:9 image Left and right Left and right The preset choices are Manual, Auto 5 sec, Auto 15 sec, and
displayed in stretched stretched to Auto 45 sec. The Auto 45 sec is the factory preset.
4:3 mode display the true
aspect Selecting a Color or Logo for Background [Background]
Native (RGB only): Turns off the Advanced AccuBlend feature. The Use this feature to display a black/ blue screen or logo when no sig-
projector displays the current image in its true resolution. nal is available.

NOTE: Selecting Projector Orientation [Orientation]


* While you are displaying an image with higher resolution than the projectors This reorients your image for your type of projection. The options
native resolution, Native is not available. are:
* You can adjust image positions for Cinema. See Cinema Position for set- desktop front projection, ceiling rear projection, desktop rear projec-
ting image positions. tion, and ceiling front projection.

Copyright
Please note that using this projector for the purpose of commercial gain or Advanced
the attraction of public attention in a venue such as a coffee shop or hotel and
employing compression or expansion of the screen image with a "Aspect
Ratio" setting may raise concern about the infringement of copyrights which
are protected by copyright law.

Adjusting the Vertical Position of Image [Cinema Position] (for Cin-


ema only)
This feature adjusts the vertical position of the image when viewing
video with an aspect ratio selected.
When Cinema is selected in Aspect Ratio, the image is displayed
with black borders on the top and bottom.
You can adjust the vertical position between top and bottom.

NOTE: This option is available only when Cinema is selected in Aspect Ra-
tio. Disabling the Cabinet Buttons [Control Panel Key Lock]
This option turns on or off the Control Panel Key Lock function.

Setup NOTE:
* This Control Panel Key Lock does not affect the remote control and the PC
Control functions.
* When the cabinet buttons are disabled, pressing and holding the CANCEL
button for about 10 seconds will change the setting to enable.
* Key symbol indicates the Control Key Lock is enabled.

Enabling Power Management [Power Management]


When this option is on and there is no input for five minutes or more,
the projector will automatically turn itself off.

Enabling High Speed Fan Mode [High Speed Fan Mode]


This option allows you to select two modes for fan speed: high-speed
mode and normal speed mode.
When you wish to cool down the temperature inside the projector
quickly, select On.

NOTE: Enable High Speed Fan mode if you continue to use the projector for
consecutive days.

E-27
Selecting Signal Format [Signal Select] Adjusting Position/Clock (when Auto Adjust is off)
<RGB> This allows you to manually adjust the image horizontally and verti-
Allows you to choose RGB for an RGB source such as a computer, cally, and adjust Clock and Phase.
or Component for a component video source such as a DVD player.
Normally select RGB/Component and the projector automatically <Horizontal/Vertical>
detects a component signal. However there may be some compo- Adjusts the image location horizontally and vertically.
nent signals that the projector is unable to detect. If this is the case, This adjustment is made automatically when the Auto Adjust is turned
select Component. Select Scart for the European Scart. on.

<Video & S-Video System Select> <Clock>


This feature enables you to select composite video standards manu- Use this item with the Auto Adjust off to fine tune the computer
ally. Normally select Auto. image or to remove any vertical banding that might appear. This func-
When you select the video standard for Video and S-Video, select tion adjusts the clock frequencies that eliminate the horizontal band-
the video standard from the pull-down menu. ing in the image. This adjustment may be necessary when you con-
This must be done for Video and S-Video respectively. nect your computer for the first time. This adjustment is made auto-
matically when the Auto Adjust is turned on.
Page2
<Phase>
Use this item to adjust the clock phase or to reduce video noise, dot
interference or cross talk. (This is evident when part of your image
appears to be shimmering.)
Use Phase only after the Clock is complete.
This adjustment is made automatically when the Auto Adjust is turned
on.

Information

Selecting Noise Reduction Level


Select one of the three levels for reducing video noise: Off, Low, or
High.

NOTE: The lower the Noise Reduction level, the better the image quality by
way of higher video bandwidth.

Enabling Auto Adjust [Auto Adjust]


When Auto Adjust is set to On, the projector automatically deter-
mines the best resolution for the current RGB input signal to project Displays the status of the current signal and lamp usage. This item has
an image using NECs Advanced AccuBlend Intelligent Pixel Blend- three pages. The information included is as follows:
ing Technology.
The image can be automatically adjusted for position and stability; [Page 1] [Page 3]
Horizontal Position, Vertical Position, Clock and Phase. Source Index Remaining Lamp Time (%)*
On .................. Automatically adjusts image Horizontal Position, Horizontal Frequency Lamp Hour Meter (H)
Vertical Position, Clock and Phase. Vertical Frequency Filter Usage
Sync Polarity Projector Usage
Off .................. User can adjust the image display functions (Hori-
* The progress indicator shows the
zontal Position, Vertical Position, Clock and
[Page 2] percentage of remaining bulb life.
Phase) manually.
Signal Type The value informs you of the
Video Type amount of lamp usage. When the
Sync Type remaining lamp time reaches 0,
Interlace the Remaining Lamp Time bar in-
dicator changes from 0% to 100
Hours and starts counting down.
If the remaining lamp time reaches
0 hours, the projector will not turn
on regardless of whether the lamp
mode is set to Normal or Eco.

E-28
Default

Returning to Factory Default


The Factory Default feature allows you to change adjustments and set-
ting to the factory preset for source except the following:

<Current Signal>
Resets the adjustments for the current signal to the factory preset lev-
els.
The items that can be reset are: Brightness, Contrast, Color, Hue, Sharp-
ness, Aspect, Horizontal Position, Vertical Position, Clock, Phase and
Color Correction.

<All Data>
Reset all the adjustments and settings for all the signals to the factory
preset.
The items can be reset except Language, Lamp Remaining Time, Lamp
Hour Meter and Filter Usage. To reset the lamp usage time, see Clear
Lamp Hour Meter and Clear Filter Usage.

<Clear Filter Usage>


Resets the filter usage back to zero. Selecting this option displays
submenu for a confirmation.

<Clear Lamp Hour Meter>


Resets the lamp clock back to zero. Selecting this option displays
submenu for a confirmation.

NOTE: The projector will turn off and go into standby mode after 2100 hours (up
to 3100 hours in Eco mode) of service. If this happens, press the Help button
on the remote control for ten seconds to reset the lamp clock back to zero. Do
this only after replacing the lamp.

E-29
MAINTENANCE
This section describes the simple maintenance procedures you should 3. Insert a new lamp housing until the lamp housing is plugged into the
follow to replace the lamp and clean the filter. socket.

Replacing the Lamp CAUTION


Do not use a lamp other than the NEC replacement lamp (VT60LP).
After your lamp has been operating for 2000 hours (up to 3000 hours in
Order this from your NEC dealer.
Eco mode) or longer, the LAMP indicator in the cabinet will blink red
and the message will appear. Even though the lamp may still be work-
Secure it in place with the two screws.
ing, replace it at 2000 (up to 3000 hours in Eco mode) hours to maintain
Be sure to tighten the screws.
optimal projector performance.

CAUTION
DO NOT TOUCH THE LAMP immediately after it has been used.
It will be extremely hot. Turn the projector off, wait 60 seconds,
turn off the main power switch and then disconnect the power
cable. Allow at least one hour for the lamp to cool before han-
dling.
DO NOT REMOVE ANY SCREWS except the lamp cover screw
and two lamp case screws. You could receive an electric shock.
The projector will turn off and go into stand by mode after 2100
(up to 3100 hours in Eco mode) hours of service. If this hap-
pens, be sure to replace the lamp. If you continue to use the
lamp after 2000 hours (up to 3000 hours in Eco mode) of use, 4. Reattach the lamp cover.
the lamp bulb may shatter, and pieces of glass may be scat-
tered in the lamp case. Do not touch them as the pieces of glass Tighten the lamp cover screw.
may cause injury. If this happens, contact your NEC dealer for Be sure to tighten the screw.
lamp replacement.

To replace the lamp:


1. Loosen the lamp cover screw until the screwdriver goes into a free-
wheeling condition and remove the lamp cover. The lamp cover screw
is not removable.

Catch

5. After you install a new lamp, select the menu [Default] [Clear
Lamp Hour Meter] to reset the lamp usage hours.

NOTE: When the lamp exceeds 2100 hours (up to 3100 hours in Eco mode)
of service, the projector cannot turn on and the menu is not displayed. If this
happens, press the Help button on the remote control for a minimum of 10
2. Loosen the two screws securing the lamp housing until the screw- seconds while in standby mode. When the lamp time clock is reset to zero,
driver goes into a freewheeling condition. The two screws are not the LAMP indicator goes out.
removable.

Remove the lamp housing by holding it.

NOTE: There is an interlock on this case to prevent the risk of electrical shock.
Do not attempt to circumvent this interlock.

Catch

Interlock

E-30
Cleaning 3. Reinstall the new filter cover.

Cleaning or Replacing the Filter


The air-filter sponge keeps the inside of the projector from dust or dirt
and should be cleaned after every 100 hours of operation (more often in
dusty conditions). If the filter is dirty or clogged, your projector may over-
heat.

CAUTION
Turn off the projector, turn off the main power switch and un-
plug the projector before replacing the filter.
Only clean the outside of the filter cover with a vacuum cleaner.
Do not attempt to operate the projector without the filter cover. NOTE: Do not wash the filter with soap and water. Soap and water will damage
the filter membrane. Before replacing the filter, remove dust and dirt from the
projector cabinet. Keep out dust and during filter replacement.
To clean the air-filter:
Vacuum the filter-through the filter cover. NOTE: When you replace the lamp, it is also wise to replace the filter. The filter
comes in the same package with your replacement lamp.

Cleaning the Cabinet and the Lens

To reset the filter usage time, from the menu, select [Default] [Clear
Filter Usage].
See also page E-29 for resetting the filter usage time.

To replace the filter (sponge):


1. Remove the filter cover by pushing up on the catch of the cover until 1. Turn off the projector before cleaning.
you feel it detach. 2. Clean the cabinet periodically with a damp cloth. If heavily soiled,
use a mild detergent. Never use strong detergents or solvents such
as alcohol or thinner.
Catch
3. Use a blower or lens paper to clean the lens, and be careful not to
scratch or mar the lens.

2. Gently peel off the filter (sponge) and replace it with the new one.

E-31
TROUBLESHOOTING
This section helps you resolve problems you may encounter while setting up or using the projector.

Power Indicator
Indicator Condition Projector Condition Note
Off The main power is off
Blinking light Green blinking 0.5 sec ON, The projector is getting ready Wait for a moment.
0.5 sec OFF to turn on.
Orange blinking 0.5 sec ON, The projector is cooling down. Wait for a moment.
0.5 sec OFF
Steady light Green The projector is turned on.
Orange The projector is in Standby.

Status Indicator
Indicator Condition Projector Condition Note
Off Normal
Blinking light Red blinking 1 cycle (0.5 sec ON, Lamp cover error or lamp Replace the lamp cover or
2.5 sec OFF) housing error lamp housing correctly.
2 cycle (0.5 sec ON, Temperature error The projector is overheated.
0.5 sec OFF) Move the projector to a cooler
location.

4 cycle (0.5 sec ON, Fan error Fans will not work correctly.
0.5 sec OFF)
6 cycle (0.5 sec ON, Lamp error Lamp fails to light. Wait a full
0.5 sec OFF) minute and then turn on again.
Green blinking Re-firing the lamp The projector is re-firing.

Steady light Orange Control key locked You have pressed control
panel key when Control Key
Lock is enabled.

Lamp Indicator

Indicator Condition Projector Condition Note


Off Normal
Blinking light Red Lamp has reached its end of Replace the lamp.
life. Lamp replacement mes-
sage will be displayed.
Steady light Red Lamp has been used beyond Replace the lamp.
its limit. The projector will not
turn on until the lamp is re-
placed.
Green Lamp mode is set to Eco mode

E-32
Common Problems & Solutions

Problem Check These Items

Does not turn on Check that the power cable is plugged in and that the power button on the projector cabinet or the remote
control is on. See pages E-16 and 17.
Ensure that the lamp cover or lamp housing is installed correctly. See page E-30.
Check to see if the projector has overheated or the lamp has reached the end of its usable life. If there is
insufficient ventilation around the projector or if the room where youre presenting is particularly warm, move
the projector to a cooler location.

No picture Use the RGB, Video or S-Video button on the remote control or the cabinet to select your source (RGB, Video
or S-Video). See page E-18.
Ensure your cables are connected properly.
Use menus to adjust the brightness and contrast. See page E-26.
Remove the lens cap.
Reset the settings or adjustments to factory preset levels using Factory Default in the menu. See page E-29.

Image isnt square to the Reposition the projector to improve its angle to the screen. See page E-18.
screen Use the Keystone correction function to correct the trapezoid distortion. See page E-19.

Picture is blurred Adjust the focus. See page E-19.


Reposition the projector to improve its angle to the screen. See page E-18.
Ensure that the distance between the projector and screen is within the adjustment range of the lens. See
pages E-11 and 12.
Condensation may form on the lens if the projector is cold, brought into a warm place and is then turned on.
Should this happen, let the projector stand until there is no condensation on the lens.

Image is scrolling verti- Use the RGB, VIDEO or S-VIDEO button on the remote control or the cabinet to select the source you want to
cally, horizontally or input.
both

Remote control does Install new batteries. See page E-10.


not work Make sure there are no obstacles between you and the projector.
Stand within 22 feet (7 m) of the projector. See page E-10.
Make sure that you are in the Projector mode and the PJ button lights in red. If not, press the PJ button. See
page E-21.

Indicator is lit or blink- See the Power/Status/Lamp Indicator on page E-32.


ing

Cross color in RGB If Auto Adjust is off, turn it on or adjust the image manually with Horizontal / Vertical / Clock / Phase in the
mode Advanced menu. See page E-28.

E-33
SPECIFICATIONS
This section provides technical information about the VT660/VT560/VT460 Projector's performance

Model Number VT660/VT560/VT460

Optical
LCD Panel VT660: 0.7" p-Si TFT active-matrix with Micro Lens Array
VT560/VT460: 0.7" p-Si TFT active-matrix
Resolution VT660/VT560: 1024768 pixels native, up to UXGA with Advanced AccuBlend
VT460: 800600 pixels native, up to UXGA with Advanced AccuBlend
Lens Manual zoom and focus:
F1.7 - 2.0 f=21.6 - 25.9mm
Lamp 200 W (160 W Eco mode)
Image Size 21 - 300 inches (0.5 - 7.6 m) diagonal
Projection Distance 2.38 - 35.8 ft / 7.3 (Tele) - 10.9 m (Tele)
Projection Angle Tele : 9.5 - 10.0 Wide : 11.3 - 11.8
Keystone Correction +/- 30 degrees electronic (auto)

Electrical
Inputs 1 RGB/Component (D-Sub 15 Pin), 1 S-Video (DIN 4 Pin), 1 Video (RCA),
1 Stereo Mini Audio, 2 (L/R) RCA Audio, 1 PC Control (DIN 8 Pin)
Outputs 1 RGB (D-Sub 15 Pin), 1 Stereo Mini Audio
USB Port 1 B Type
Video Compatibility NTSC, NTSC4.43, PAL, PAL-60, PAL-N, PAL-M, SECAM, HDTV: 1080i, 1080i/50Hz, 720p, 576p, 480p, 480i/
60Hz
Scan Rate Horizontal: 15 kHz to 100 kHz (RGB: 24 kHz or over) / Vertical: 50 Hz to 120 Hz
Video Bandwidth RGB: 80 MHz (-3dB)
Color Reproduction 16.7 million colors simultaneously, Full color
Horizontal Resolution NTSC / NTSC4.43/PAL/PAL-M/PAL-N/PAL60: 550 TV lines
SECAM: 350 TV lines
YCbCr: 800 TV lines
RGB: VT660/VT560 / 1024 dots (H)768 dots (V), VT460 / 800 dots (H)600 dots (V)
External Control RS232, IR
Sync Compatibility Separate Sync / Composite Sync / Sync on G
Built-in Speaker 1W (monaural)
Power Requirement 100 - 120V AC / 200 - 240V AC, 50 / 60 Hz
Input Current 2.9A (100 - 120V AC) / 1.4A (200 - 240V AC)
Power Consumption 7.5W in Standby mode / 260 W in Lamp Normal mode / 220 W in Lamp Eco mode

Mechanical
Installation Orientation Desktop/Front, Desktop/Rear, Ceiling/Front, Ceiling/Rear
Dimensions 12.2" (W)3.5" (H)9.1" (D)
310mm (W)89mm (H)230mm (D)
(not including protrusions)
Net Weight 6.5 lbs / 2.9 kg
Environmental Considerations
Operational Temperatures : 32 to 95F (0 to 35C), 20% to 80% humidity (non-condensing)
Storage Temperatures : 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C), 20% to 80% humidity (non-condensing)
Regulations UL Approved (UL 60950, CSA 60950)
Meets DOC Canada Class B requirements
Meets FCC Class B requirements
Meets AS/NZS3548 Class B
Meets EMC Directive (EN55022:1998, EN55024-1998, EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3)
Meets Low Voltage Directive (EN60950, TUV GS Approved)

For additional information visit:


US : http://www.necvisualsystems.com
Europe : http://www.nec-europe.com/
Global : http://www.nec-pj.com/

LCD panels are inherently susceptible to pixel defects.


For additional information regarding pixel data, please contact your local NEC sales office.

The specifications are subject to change without notice.

E-34
APPENDIX
Cabinet Dimensions

89(3.5")

245(9.6")
230(9.1")

310(12.2")

Lens center
73.5(2.9")

(1.6")
41.7
99.2(3.9")
96(3.8")

Lens center

Unit = mm (inch)

Pin Assignments of D-Sub RGB Input Connector


Mini D-Sub 15 Pin Connector

Pin No. RGB Signal (Analog) YCbCr Signal


5 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6 1 Red Cr
15 14 13 12 11 2 Green or Sync on Green Y
3 Blue Cb
Signal Level 4 Ground
Video signal : 0.7Vp-p (Analog) 5 Ground
Sync signal : TTL level
6 Red Ground Cr Ground
7 Green Ground Y Ground
8 Blue Ground Cb Ground
9 No Connection
10 Sync Signal Ground
11 SCART Sync Sync
12 Bi-directional DATA (SDA)
13 Horizontal Sync or Composite Sync
14 Vertical Sync
15 Data Clock

E-35
Compatible Input Signal List
Signal Resolution Frequency H. Refresh Rate
( Dots ) ( kHz ) ( Hz )
NTSC 15.734 60
PAL 15.625 50
SECAM 15.625 50
VESA 640 480 31.47 59.94
IBM 640 480 31.47 60
MAC 640 480 31.47 60
MAC 640 480 34.97 66.67
MAC 640 480 35 66.67
VESA 640 480 37.86 72.81
VESA 640 480 37.5 75
IBM 640 480 39.375 75
VESA 640 480 43.269 85.01
IBM 720 350 31.469 70.09
VESA 720 400 37.927 85.04
IBM 720 350 39.44 87.85
IBM 720 400 39.44 87.85
VESA 800 600 35.16 56.25
VESA 800 600 37.879 60.32
VESA 800 600 48.077 72.19
VESA 800 600 46.88 75
VESA 800 600 53.674 85.06
MAC 832 624 49.725 74.55
@ VESA 1024 768 35.5 43 Interlaced
@ VESA 1024 768 48.363 60
@ VESA 1024 768 56.476 70.07
@ MAC 1024 768 60.241 74.93
@ VESA 1024 768 60.023 75.03
@ VESA 1024 768 68.677 85
@ # VESA 1152 864 67.5 75
@ # MAC 1152 870 68.681 75.06
@ # SUN 1152 900 61.796 65.95
@ # SGI 1152 900 71.736 76.05
@ # VESA 1280 960 60 60
@ # VESA 1280 1024 63.981 60.02
@ # MAC 1280 1024 69.89 65.2
@ # HP 1280 1024 78.125 72.01
@ # SUN 1280 1024 81.13 76.11
@ # VESA 1280 1024 79.976 75.03
@ # VESA 1280 1024 91.146 85.02
@ # SXGA+ 1400 1050
@ # HDTV (1080p) 1920 1080 67.5 60
@ # SDTV(576i)(625i) 15.6 50
@ # SDTV(576p)(625p) 31.5 50
@ # HDTV (1080i)(1125i) 1920 1080 33.75 60 Interlace
@ # HDTV (1080i)(1125i) 1920 1080 28.13 50 Interlace
@ # HDTV (720p)(750p) 1280 720 45 60 Progressive
@ # SDTV (480p)(525p) 31.47 59.94 Progressive
@ # VESA 1600 1200 75.0 60
@ # VESA 1600 1200 81.3 65
@ # VESA 1600 1200 87.5 70
@ # VESA 1600 1200 93.75 75
DVD YCbCr 15.734 59.94 Interlaced
DVD YCbCr 15.625 50 Interlaced

# : Images in above flagged with # are compressed with Advanced AccuBlend on VT660/VT560.
@ : Images in above flagged with @ are compressed with Advanced AccuBlend on VT460.

NOTE: Some composite sync signals may not be displayed correctly.


Signals other than those specified in the table above may not be displayed correctly. If this should happen, change
the refresh rate or resolution on your PC. Refer to Display Properties help section of your PC for procedures.
UXGA (16001200) is supported for separate sync signal only.

E-36
TravelCare Guide 6) Problems or damage caused by expendable supplies or devices
connected to the product other than those designated by NEC.
TravelCare - a service for international travelers 7) Problems caused by natural consumption, wear or deterioration
of parts under normal usage conditions.
This product is eligible for "TravelCare", NEC's unique international war-
ranty. 8) Problems or damage to lamps and other expendable supplies,
Please note that TravelCare coverage differs in part from coverage un- included parts or optional parts.
der the warranty included with the product. 9) Other conditions stipulated in the warranty included with the prod-
uct also apply.
Services offered with TravelCare
This warranty allows customers to receive service on their product at NOTE: The product can be used overseas with voltages of 100 to 120V and 200
the NEC and NEC-designated service stations in the countries listed to 240V by using a power cable suited for the standards and power source volt-
herein when temporarily traveling internationally for business or plea- age of the country in which the product is being used.
sure.
For details on services offered by the different service stations, please List of TravelCare Outlets
refer to the "List of TravelCare Outlets" below.
This list applies as of June 1, 2002.
For the most up-to-date information, please refer to the websites of the
1 Repair services
service stations in the various countries on the List of TravelCare Out-
The product will be repaired and delivered within 10 business days,
lets or to the NEC website at http://www.nec-pj.com.
not including shipping time.
During the term of warranty, the cost of maintenance parts, labor
In Europe
costs for repairs and shipping costs within the service station's cov-
NEC Europe, Ltd. / European Technical Centre
erage area are covered by the warranty.
Address: Unit G, Stafford Park 12, Telford TF3 3BJ, U.K.
Telephone: +44 1952 237000
2 Replacement product rental service
Fax Line: +44 1952 237006
If the customer desires, he or she can rent a replacement product
Email Address: AFR@uk.neceur.com
while the original product is being repaired.
WEB Address: http://www.neceur.com
Fee: US$200 for 12 days
This fee must be paid at the local service station in cash or credit
(Regions Covered)
card.
EU: Austria*, Belgium*, Denmark*, Finland*, France*, Germany*,
The $200 rental fee is non-refundable even if the customer rents it
Greece*, Ireland*, Italy*, Luxembourg*, The Netherlands*,
less than 12 days before returning.
Portugal*, Spain*, Sweden* and the United Kingdom*
The replacement product will be delivered within 3 business days.
EEA: Norway*, Iceland and Liechtenstein
If the customer did not return the replacement product within 12 days,
the customer will be charged the price of the unit.
In North America
If the customer returned the replacement product in a faulty or dam-
NEC Solutions (America), Inc.
aged condition, the repair cost will be charged to the customer.
Address: 1250 Arlington Heights Road, Itasca,
Note that this service is not offered in all countries and regions. Please
Illinois 60143, U.S.A.
refer to the "List of TravelCare Outlets".
Telephone: +1 800 836 0655
In addition, this replacement product rental service is not offered af-
Fax Line: +1 800 356 2415
ter the product's warranty has expired.
Email Address: vsd-tech-support@necsam.com
WEB Address: http://www.necvisualsystems.com
Term of warranty
1 (Regions Covered)
a. Upon presentation of the warranty or receipt received upon pur- U.S.A. *, Canada*
chase:
In Oceania
Valid for the term indicated on the warranty or the normal term of NEC Australia Pty., Ltd.
warranty for the country of purchase. Address: New South Wales;
b. When only the product is brought in: 184 Milperra Road, Reversby 2212
Valid for a period of within 14 months of the date of manufacture Victoria;
indicated by the serial number attached to the product. 480 Princess Hwy Noble Park 3174
South Australia;
2 When a product whose term of warranty is expired is brought in: 84A Richmond Road, Keswick 5035
Repairs will be offered for a fee. In this case the customer is not Queensland;
eligible for the replacement product rental service. 116 Ipswich Road, Woollongabba 4102
3 In the following cases, repairs may be charged, even if the product's Western Australia;
warranty is still in effect: 45 Sarich Court Osborne Park 6017
Telephone: 131 632 (from domestic)
1) If the term of warranty, model name, serial number and name of +61 8 8375 5706 (from overseas)
the store of purchase are not indicated on the warranty or have Fax Line: +61 8 8375 5757
been altered. Email Address: lee.gramola@nec.com.au
2) Problems or damage caused by dropping or shocks during ship- WEB Address: http://www.nec.com.au
ment or movement by the customer or by improper handling by
the customers. (Regions Covered)
Australia*, New Zealand
3) Problems or damage caused by improper usage or unwarrant-
able alterations or repairs by the customer.
4) Problems or damage caused by fire, salt damage, gas damage,
earthquakes, lightning damage, storm or flood damage or other
natural disasters or such external factors as dust, cigarette
smoke, abnormal voltage, etc.
5) Problems or damage caused by use in hot or humid places, in
vehicles, boats or ships, etc.

E-37
In Asia and Middle East ABBA Electronics L.L.C.
NEC Viewtechnology, Ltd. Address: Tariq Bin Ziyad Road, P.O.Box 327, Dubai,
Address: 686-1, Nishioi, Oi-Machi, Ashigarakami-Gun, United Arab Emirates
Kanagawa 258-0017, Japan Telephone: +971 4 371800
Telephone: +81 465 85 2369 Fax Line: +971 4 364283
Fax Line: +81 465 85 2393 Email Address: ABBA@emirates.net.ae
Email Address: support_pjweb@nevt.nec.co.jp
WEB Address: http://www.nec-pj.com (Regions Covered)
United Arab Emirates
(Regions Covered)
Japan* Samir Photographic Supplies
Address: P.O.Box 599, Jeddah 21421, Saudi Arabia
NEC Hong Kong Ltd. Telephone: +966 2 6828219
Address: 11th Floor, Tower B, New Mandarin Plaza, 14 Fax Line: +966 2 6830820
Science Museum Road, Email Address: vartkes@samir-photo.com
Tsim Sha Tsui East, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Telephone: +852 2369 0335 (Regions Covered)
Fax Line: +852 2795 6618 Saudi Arabia
Email Address: esmond_au@nechk.nec.com.hk
WEB Address: http://www.nec.com.hk NOTE: In countries designated with an asterisk(*), replacement product rental
service are offered.
(Regions Covered)
Hong Kong

NEC Taiwan Ltd.


Address: 7F, No.167, SEC.2, Nan King East Road, Taipei,
Taiwan, R.O.C.
Telephone: +886 2 8500 1734
Fax Line: +886 2 8500 1420
Email Address: nickliao@nec.com.tw
WEB Address: http://www.nec.com.tw

(Regions Covered)
Taiwan

NEC Singapore Pte. Ltd


Address: 401 Commonwealth Drive, #07-02, Haw Par
Technocentre, Singapore 149598
Telephone: +65 6 273 8333
Fax Line: +65 6 274 2226
Email Address: daniel@rsc.necsin.nec.com.sg
WEB Address: http://www.nec.com.sg

(Regions Covered)
Singapore

Hyosung Data System, Ltd.


Address: 7th Floor, Cheongdam Building, 52,
Cheongdam-Dong,
Kangnam-Ku, Seoul, Korea 135-100
Telephone: +82 2 510 0234
Fax Line: +82 2 540 3590
Email Address: hds-ykc@hyosung.com

(Regions Covered)
South Korea

Lenso Communication Co., Ltd.


Address: 292 Lenso House 4, 1st Floor, Srinakarin Road,
Huamark, Bangkapi, Bangkok 10240, Thailand
Telephone: +66 2 375 2425
Fax Line: +66 2 375 2434
Email Address: pattara@lenso.com
WEB Address: http://www.lenso.com

(Regions Covered)
Thailand

E-38
Date: / / , P-1/ ,

TO: NEC or NEC's Authorized Service Station:


FM:

(Company & Name with signature)

Dear Sir (s),


I would like to apply your TravelCare Service Program based on attached registration and qualification sheet and agree with your
following conditions, and also the Service fee will be charged to my credit card account, if I don't return the Loan units within the
specified period. I also confirm following information is correct. Regards.

Application Sheet for TravelCare Service Program

Country,
product purchased :

User's Company Name :

User's Company Address :


Phone No., Fax No. :

User's Name :

User's Address :

Phone No., Fax No. :

Local Contact office :

Local Contact office Address :

Phone No., Fax No. :

User's Model Name :

Date of Purchase :

Serial No. on cabinet :

Problem of units per User :

Required Service : (1) Repair and Return (2) Loan unit

Requested period of Loan unit :

Payment method : (1) Credit Card (2) Travelers Cheque (3) Cash

In Case of Credit Card :


Card No. w/Valid Date :

E-39
Condition of your TravelCare Service Program 5. Loan Service Charges and Conditions:
Upon acceptance of this NEC Projector, Customer agrees to assume
Enduser is requested to understand following condition of TravelCare
liability for this loan unit.
Service Program and fill necessary information into the application sheet.
The current cost of use of this loan unit is $200.00 USD for 12 calendar
1. Service Options:
days.
There are 3 types of "Service" available. Enduser has to understand
If Customer does not return the unit within the 12 calendar days, Cus-
following condition and is required to fill in the Application Sheet.
tomer will be charged the next highest cost up to and including the full
list price to Credit Cards, which price will be informed by NEC Autho-
1) Repair and Return:
rized Service Stations. Please see the attached listing of contacts for
The 'Faulty unit' is sent or collected from the customer. It is repaired each country to arrange for pickup of the loan unit.
and returned within 10 days to the customer, excluding transport time.
There may have a case, repair and return can't be done by NEC If you return to their country of origin with the loan unit, you will be
Authorized Service Station, because of shortage of spare parts due charged additional freight to return the unit to the loaning country.
to same model is not sold in the territory.
Thank you for your understanding of this program.
2) Repair and Return with Loan: (This service is limited to some Ser-
vice Stations)
This service is offered to the Enduser, who cannot wait until their unit
is repaired.
The customer can borrow a unit for $200 up to 12 days. Customer
then sends in inoperable unit to nearest NEC Authorized Service
Station for service. In order to prevent collection problem, Enduser is
required to fill in Application Sheet.
Enduser needs to confirm the availability of the Service to NEC Au-
thorized Service Stations.
3) Loan Only:
For this service, NEC Authorized Service Station supplies the cus-
tomer with a loan unit for US$200 up to 12 days. Customer keeps the
inoperable unit and when customer returns home, customer arranges
to have the projector serviced in the home country.

2. Warranty Exclusions:
This program does not apply if the Projector's serial number has been
defaced, modified or removed.
If, in the judgement of NEC Authorized Service Station or its agent the
defects or failures result from any cause other than fair wear and tear or
NEC neglect, or fault including the following without limitation:

1) Accidents, transportation, neglect, misuse, abuse, water, dust, smoke


or default of or by the Customer its employees or agents or any third
party;
2) Failure or fluctuation of electrical power, electrical circuitry, air condi-
tioning, humidity control or other environmental conditions such as
use it in smoking area;
3) Any fault in the attachments or associated products or components
(whether or not supplied by NEC or its agents which do not form part
of the Product covered by this warranty);
4) Any act of God, fire, flood, war, act of violence or any similar occur-
rence;
5) Any attempt by any person other than any person authorized by NEC
to adjust, modify, repair, install or service the product.
6) Any Cross-border charges such as, duty, insurance, tax etc.

3. Charges for Warranty Exclusions and Out of Warranty Case:


In case faulty unit is under warranty exclusions case or under Out of
Warranty period, NEC Authorized Service Station will Inform estimation
of actual service cost to the Enduser with reason.

4. Dead on Arrival (DOA):


Enduser must take this issue up with their original supplier in the coun-
try of purchase.
NEC Authorized Service Station will repair the DOA unit as a Warranty
repair, but will not exchange DOA unit with new units.

E-40
7N950141

E-41
7N8P2431
Printed in Japan

Focus ring
Audio cable (not supplied)
Cble audio (non fourni)
Audiokabel (kein Lieferumfang)
Cavo audio (venduto separatamente) OFF ON
Cable de audio (no suministrado) POWER
Audiokabel (medfljer ej) VIDEO AUTO ADJ.
S-VIDEO RGB

MENU

RGB signal cable (supplied) Zoom lever


Cble de signal RGB (fourni)
RGB-Signalkabel (Lieferumfang) SELECT
Cavo dei segnali RGB (in dotazione)
Cable de seal RGB (suministrado)
NT

L
E

E
RGB-signalkabel (medfljer) ER NC
CA
Mini D-SUB 15 pin connector Power cable(supplied)
Connecteur Mini D-Sub 15 broches Cble d'alimentation (fourni) PJ

15poliger Mini D-Sub Anschluss Netzkabel (Lieferumfang)


Connettore mini D-SUB a 15 pin Cavo dalimentazione (in dotazione)
Conector Mini D-Sub de 15 contactos Cable de alimentacin (suministrado)
15-polig Mini D-Sub-kontakt Ntkabel (medfljer)

Connect the supplied 15pin-15pin signal cable. Connect the supplied power Turn on the main power switch. Turn on the projector. Set up the Projector.
To turn on the power to the projector, press and hold the ON/STAND BY To adjust the projectors focus or to zoom in and
For older Macintosh computers, use a commercially available pin adapter to connect to your cable. To turn on the main power to the projector, press the Main
button on the projector cabinet or the POWER ON button on the remote out use the Focus ring or Zoom lever on the
Macintoshs video port. Power switch to the ON position ( I ).
control for a minimum of 2 seconds. lens.
NOTE : To turn off the projector, press the ON/STAND BY button or the To optimize image, press the AUTO ADJ. button
NOTE : Power down all equipment before making connections. POWER OFF button twice. on the cabinet or the remote control.

Connecter le cble de signal 15 broches-15 Connecter le cble Enfoncer l'interrupteur Allumer le projecteur. Installation du projecteur.
Pour allumer le projecteur, appuyer sur la touche ON/STAND BY du Pour rgler la mise au point du projecteur ou
broches fourni. d'alimentation fourni. d'alimentation gnral. coffret du projecteur ou sur la touche POWER ON de la tlcommande pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrire, utiliser
Pour les ordinateurs Macintosh anciens, utiliser un adaptateur broche disponible dans le Pour mettre le projecteur sous tension, enfoncer et la maintenir enfonce pendant au moins 2 secondes. la bague de mise au point ou le levier de zoom
commerce pour connecter au port vido du Macintosh. l'interrupteur d'alimentation en position ON ( I ). REMARQUE: Pour arrter le projecteur, appuyer deux fois sur la touche sur lobjectif.
ON/STAND BY ou la touche POWER OFF. Pour optimiser limage, appuyer sur la touche
REMARQUE : Eteindre tous les appareils avant d'effectuer les connexions. AUTO ADJ. du coffret ou de la tlcommande.

Schlieen Sie das mitgelieferte 15polige Signalkabel Schlieen Sie das mitgelieferte Schalten Sie den Schalten Sie den Projektor ein. Stellen Sie den Projektor ein.
an. Netzkabel an. Hauptnetzschalter ein. Drcken und halten Sie zum Einschalten des Projektors die ON/STAND Bettigen Sie zum Scharfstellen bzw. zum Zoomen
BY-Taste am Projektorgehuse oder die POWER ON-Taste auf der des Projektorobjektivs den Fokussierungsring bzw.
Verwenden Sie fr ltere Macintosh-Computer einen handelsblichen Stiftadapter fr den Drcken Sie zum Einschalten der Hauptstromversorgung Fernbedienung mindestens 2 Sekunden lang gedrckt. den Zoomhebel an der Linse.
Anschluss an Ihren Macintosh-Videoport. zum Projektor den Hauptnetzschalter in ON-Position ( I ). HINWEIS: Drcken Sie zum Ausschalten des Projektors die Taste ON/ Drcken Sie zur Optimierung des Bildes die
STAND BY oder die Taste POWER OFF zweimal. Taste AUTO ADJ. am Projektorgehuse bzw.
HINWEIS : Schalten Sie vor Durchfhrung der Anschlsse alle Gerte aus. auf der Fernbedienung.

Collegate il cavo dei segnali 15 pin 15 pin in Collegate il cavo Accendete linterruttore Accensione del proiettore. Impostate il proiettore.
Per accendere la corrente del proiettore, premete e mantenete premuto Per regolare la messa a fuoco o lo zoom del
dotazione. dalimentazione in dotazione. principale. il tasto ON/STAND BY sullinvolucro del proiettore o il tasto POWER ON proiettore, utilizzate la ghiera di messa a fuoco o
Per accendere la corrente principale del proiettore, premete del telecomando, mantenendolo premuto per almeno 2 secondi. la leva dello zoom sullobiettivo.
Per i computer Macintosh di vecchia data, usate un adattatore venduto separatamente per
linterruttore principale nella posizione ON ( I ). NOTA: Per spegnere il proiettore, premete due volte il tasto ON/STAND Per ottimizzare limmagine, premete il tasto
collegare la porta video del Macintosh.
BY o il tasto POWER OFF. AUTO ADJ. sul proiettore o sul telecomando.
NOTA : spegnete tutti i componenti prima di effettuare i collegamenti.

Conecte el cable de seal de 15-15 contactos Conecte el cable de Active el interruptor de Encienda el proyector. Configure el Proyector.
Para conectar la alimentacin del proyector, pulse el botn ON/STAND Para ajustar el enfoque del proyector o para
suministrado. alimentacin suministrado. alimentacin principal. BY en la cubierta del proyector o el botn POWER ON en el mando a acercar o alejar la lente del zoom utilice el anillo
Para conectar la alimentacin principal del proyector, pulse distancia durante al menos 2 segundos. de enfoque o la palanca de zoom de la lente.
Para ordenadores Macintosh ms antiguos, utilice un adaptador de contactos (disponible en el
el interruptor de alimentacin principal de modo que quede NOTA: Para apagar el proyector, pulse dos veces el botn ON/STAND Para optimizar la imagen, pulse el botn AUTO
comercio) para realizar la conexin al puerto de vdeo del ordenador Macintosh.
en la posicin de activado ON ( I ). BY o el botn POWER OFF. ADJ. de la cubierta o del mando a distancia.
NOTA : Apague todos los equipos antes de hacer las conexiones.

Anslut den medlevererade 15P-15P-signalkabeln. Anslut den medlevererade Sl p huvudstrmbrytaren. Sl p strmmen till projektorn. Installera projektorn.
Hll strmbrytaren (ON/STAND BY) p projektorhljet eller POWER Anvnd fokusringen eller zoomspaken p linsen
Fr ldre Macintosh-datorer krvs det en srskild stiftadapter (sljs separat) fr anslutning till din ntkabeln. Fr att sl p strmmen till projektorn, stll
ON-tangenten p fjrrkontrollen intryckt i minst 2 sekunder fr att sl p fr att justera projektorns fokus eller zooma in
Macintoshs videoport. huvudstrmbrytaren i ON-lget ( I ).
strmmen till projektorn. och ut.
OBSERVERA: Du stnger av projektorn genom ON/STAND BY- Fr att optimera bilden, tryck p tangenten
OBSERVERA : Sl av strmmen till all utrustning innan anslutningarna grs. tangenten eller POWER OFF-tagenten tv gnger. AUTO ADJ. p hljet eller fjrrkontrollen.

Adjust the Tilt Foot Rglage du pied Einstellung des Regolate il piedino Ajuste de la pata de Justera lutningen
Adjustable Tilt Foot lever (1) Lift the front edge of the projector.
(2) Push up the Adjustable Tilt Foot Levers
inclinaison Kippfues dinclinazione Inclinacin med foten
Touche du pied inclinaison rglable (1) Soulevez la partie avant du projecteur. (1) Heben Sie die vordere Kante des Projektors an. (1) Sollevate il bordo anteriore del proiettore.
on the right and left sides of the projector (1) Levante el borde frontal del proyector. (1) Lyft projektorns framkant.
Einstellbare Kippfutaste (2) Poussez vers le haut les touches du pied (2) Schieben Sie die Einstellbaren Kippfu-Hebel (2) Premete verso lalto le leve del piedino
to extend the adjustable tilt feet (maxi- (2) Empuje hacia arriba los botones de pata de (2) Tryck p justerfotens spakar p
Tasto del piede dfinclinazione regolabile inclinaison rglable, sur les cts droit et auf der rechten und auf der linken Seite des inclinabile sui lati destro e sinistro del
mum height). inclinacin ajustable en el lado derecho e projektorns hger- och vnstersida
Botn de pata de inclinacin ajustable gauche du projecteur pour tendre les pieds Projektors, um die einstellbaren Kippfe proiettore per allungare il piedino regolabile
(3) Push down the Adjustable Tilt Foot Le- izquierdo del proyector con el fin de extender los fr att frlnga justerfoten
Justerbar lutningsfottangent inclinaison rglables (hauteur maximale). (maximale Hhe) auszuziehen. (altezza massima).
vers. pies de inclinacin ajustables (altura mxima). (maxhjd).
(3) Poussez vers le bas les touches du pied (3) Drcken Sie die Einstellbaren Kippfu-Hebel (3) Premete verso il basso le leve del piedino (3) Empuje hacia abajo los botones de pata de (3) Tryck justerfotens spakar nedt.
Adjustable Tilt Foot (4) Lower the front of the projector to the de-
inclinaison rglable. nach unten. regolabile. inclinacin ajustable. (4) Snk projektorns framkant till nskad
Pied inclinaison rglable sired height (max. 40mm/1.6") and re-
(4) Abaissez lavant du projecteur jusqu la (4) Senken Sie die Vorderseite des Projektors auf (4) Abbassate il lato anteriore del proiettore (4) Baje la parte frontal del proyector a la altura hjd (max. 40mm/1,6") och slpp
Einstellbarer Kippfu lease the Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever to
hauteur dsire (maxi. 40mm/1,6") et dgagez die gewnschte Hhe herab (max. 40mm/1,6") allaltezza desiderata (max. 40mm/1,6") e deseada (40mm/1,6" mx.) y libere los botones spaken s att justerfoten lser i lge.
Piede dinclinazione regolabile lock the Adjustable tilt foot. There is ap-
la touche du pied inclinaison rglable afin de und lassen Sie den jeweiligen Einstellbaren rilasciate le leve del piedino regolabile per de pie de inclinacin ajustable para Projektorns framsida kan justeras
Pata de inclinacin ajustable proximately 10 degrees of up and down
verrouiller le pied inclinaison rglable. On Kippfu-Hebel los, um den Einstellbaren Kippfu bloccare il piedino. Il lato anteriore del asegurar el pie de inclinacin ajustable. Hay ungefr 10 grader uppt eller nedt.
Justerbar lutningsfot adjustment for the front of the projector.
peut rgler lavant du projecteur denviron 10 zu sichern. Sie haben die Mglichkeit die proiettore pu essere inclinato di 10 circa aproximadamente 10 grados de ajuste hacia
degrs de rglage vers le haut et le bas. Vorderseite des Projektors um etwa 10 Grad zu verso lalto ed il basso. arriba y hacia abajo para la parte frontal del
heben und zu senken. proyector.

Auto Keystone Correction


No special operation required. Just put the pro-
jector on a flat surface and the Auto Keystone
Manual Vertical Keystone
Correction
You can also correct the vertical keystone dis-
1 Turn off the Auto Keystone function.
2 Select the Keystone function.
3 Correct the vertical distortion.

correction feature will correct the vertical distor-


tion of a projected image on the screen. Note tortion manually.
that the vertical keystone angle can be cor-
rected between 30 degrees upward and 30 de-
grees downward of projector tilt from level. Vertical Keystoning

Use the SELECT button on the cabinet to select Image and then Use the SELECT button to select Image and then Keystone Use the SELECT or button to correct the vertical keystone
Auto Keystone from the menu. from the menu. distortion.
Press the MENU button to close the menu.

Correction automatique
de distorsion de trapze
Correction manuelle de
distorsion trapze 1 Inactiver la fonction Auto Keystone.
2 Slectionner la fonction Keystone.
3 Corriger la distorsion verticale.

Aucune opration spciale nest ncessaire. verticale


Placer tout simplement le projecteur sur une sur-
face plane et la fonction automatique de correction Il est galement possible de corriger
de trapze corrigera la distorsion verticale de manuellement la distorsion de trapze
limage projete sur lcran. Langle vertical de verticale.
correction de trapze peut tre corrig dans une Distorsion de trapze verticale
fourchette allant de 30 degrs vers le haut 30
degrs vers le bas par rapport linclinaison du Utiliser la touche SELECT du coffret pour slectionner Options de Utiliser la touche SELECT pour slectionner Options de limage Utiliser la touche SELECT ou pour corriger la distorsion de
projecteur en partant de la position mise niveau. limage puis Auto Keystone dans le menu. puis Keystone dans le menu. trapze verticale.
Appuyez sur la touche MENU pour fermer le menu.

Automatische
Trapezkorrektur
Hierzu ist keine spezielle Vorgehensweise
Manuelle Trapezkorrektur
Sie knnen die vertikale Trapezverzerrung
auch manuell korrigieren.
1 Schalten Sie die Funktion Auto Trapez aus.
2 Whlen Sie die Funktion Trapez.
3 Korrigieren Sie die vertikale Bildverzerrung.

erforderlich. Stellen Sie den Projektor einfach


auf einer ebenen Flche auf, und die
automatische Trapezkorrektur gleicht die
vertikale Verzerrung des projizierten Bildes aus.
Beachten Sie, dass der vertikale Trapezwinkel Vertikale Trapezkorrektur
nur ausreichend korrigiert werden kann, wenn
der Projektor maximal um 30 Grad nach oben Drcken Sie die Taste SELECT auf dem Projektorgehuse und whlen Drcken Sie die Taste SELECT und whlen Sie Bild-Optionen Drcken Sie die Taste SELECT bzw. , um die vertikale
oder unten geneigt ist. Sie Bild-Optionen und anschlieend Auto Trapez aus dem Men aus. und anschlieend Trapez aus dem Men aus. Trapezverzerrung zu korrigieren.
Drcken Sie die Taste MENU, um das Men zu schlieen.

Correzione automatica della


deformazione trapezoidale
Correzione manuale della
deformazione 1 Disattivate la funzione Auto chiave.
2 Selezionate la funzione Chiave.
3 Correggete la distorsione verticale.

Non sono richieste operazioni speciali. trapezoidale verticale


E sufficiente posizionare il proiettore su una
superficie piana e la funzione di correzione La deformazione trapezoidale verticale pu
automatica della deformazione trapezoidale essere corretta anche manualmente.
corregger la distorsione verticale di
unimmagine proiettata sullo schermo. Nota: Deformazione trapezoidale verticale
langolo di deformazione trapezoidale verticale
pu essere corretto di 30 gradi di inclinazione Utilizzate il tasto SELECT sul proiettore per selezionare Opzioni Utilizzate il tasto SELECT per selezionare Opzioni Immagine, Utilizzate i tasti SELECT o per correggere la distorsione
del proiettore verso lalto ed il basso. Immagine, quindi Auto chiave dal menu. quindi Chiave dal menu. della deformazione trapezoidale verticale.
Premete il tasto MENU per chiudere il menu.

Correccin trapezoidal
automtica
No requiere una operacin especial. Coloque el
Correccin trapezoidal
vertical manual
Puede corregir manualmente la distorsin trap-
1 Apague la funcin Auto Keystone.
2 Seleccione la funcin Keystone.
3 Corrija la distorsin vertical.

proyector en una superficie plana y la funcin ezoidal vertical.


de correccin trapezoidal automtica corregir
la distorsin vertical de una imagen proyectada
en la pantalla. Observe que el ngulo trapezoi-
dal vertical puede corregir entre 30 grados hacia Correccin trapezoidal vertical
arriba y 30 grados hacia abajo la inclinacin del
proyector. Utilice el botn SELECT de la cubierta para seleccionar Opciones de Utilice el botn SELECT para seleccionar Opciones de imagen Utilice el botn SELECT o para corregir la correccin trap-
imagen y a continuacin Auto Keystone del men. y a continuacin Keystone del men. ezoidal vertical Distorsin trapezoidal.
Pulse el botn MENU para cerrar el men.

Automatisk
keystonekorrigering
Det krvs inga srskilda tgrder. Placera bara
Manuell vertikal
keystonekorrigering
Du kan ocks korrigera den vertikala
1 Stng av funktionen Auto Keystone.
2 Vlj Keystonefunktionen.
3 Korrigera den vertikala distorsionen.

projektorn p en plan yta, s funktionen fr keystonedistorsionen manuellt.


automatisk keystonekorrigering korrigerar den
vertikala distorsionen hos en projicerad bild p
skrmen. Observera att den vertikala
Vertikal keystonekorrigering
keystonevinkeln kan korrigeras mellan 30
grader uppt och 30 grader nedt i frhllande
till projektorns plana vinkel. Anvnd SELECT-tangenten p hljet fr att vlja Bildalternativ och Anvnd SELECT-tangenten fr att vlja Bildalternativ och sedan Anvnd tangenten SELECT eller fr att korrigera den
sedan Auto Keystone p menyn. Keystone p menyn. vertikala keystonedistorsionen.
Tryck p MENU-tangenten fr att stnga menyn.
This section helps you resolve problems you may encounter while setting up or using the Cette section facilite la rsolution des problmes pouvant tre rencontrs pendant Dieses Kapitel hilft Ihnen bei der Beseitigung von Strungen, die bei der Einrichtung oder
projector. linstallation ou lutilisation du projecteur. whrend des Betriebes Ihres Projektors auftreten knnen.

Power Indicator Voyant dalimentation Netzanzeige


Indicator Condition Projector Condition Note Condition du voyant Condition du projecteur Remarque Anzeige-Zustand Projektor-Zustand Hinweis
Off The main power is off Eteint Lalimentation principale est coupe. Aus Die Hauptstromversorgung ist ausgeschaltet.
Blinking light Green blinking (0.5 sec ON, 0.5 sec OFF) The projector is getting ready to turn on. Wait for a moment. Voyant Voyant vert (0,5 sec ON, 0,5 sec OFF) Le projecteur est prt s'allumer. Attendre un instant. Anzeige Grnes Blinken (0,5 Sek. AN, 0,5 Sek. AUS) Der Projektor macht sich einschaltbereit. Warten Sie einen Moment.
Orange blinking (0.5 sec ON,0.5 sec OFF) The projector is cooling down. Wait for a moment. clignotant Clignote en orange (0,5 sec ON, 0,5 sec OFF) Le projecteur est en cours de refroidissement. Attendre un instant. blinkt Oranges Blinken (0,5 Sek. AN, 0,5 Sek. AUS) Der Projektor befindet sich in der Abkhlphase. Warten Sie einen Moment.
Steady light Green The projector is turned on. Voyant Vert Le projecteur est allum. Anzeige Grn Der Projektor ist eingeschaltet.
Orange The projector is in Standby. stationnaire Orange Le projecteur est en mode veille. leuchtet Orange Der Projektor befindet sich im
Bereitschaftbetrieb.
Status Indicator Voyant dtat
Indicator Condition Projector Condition Note Condition du voyant Condition du projecteur Remarque Statusanzeige
Eteint Normal Anzeige-Zustand Projektor-Zustand Hinweis
Off Normal
Voyant Clignote en 1 cycle Erreur du couvercle de la Replacer correctement le couvercle Aus Normal
Blinking light Red blinking 1 cycle Lamp cover error or lamp Replace the lamp cover or lamp
clignotant rouge (0,5 sec ON, 2,5 sec OFF) lampe et erreur du le de la lampe ou le logement de la Anzeige blinkt Rotes 1 Zyklus Lampenabdeckungsfehler oder Bringen Sie die Lampenabdeckung
(0.5 sec ON, 2.5 sec OFF) housing error. housing correctly.
coffret de la lampe. lampe. Blinken (0,5 Sek. AN, 2,5 Sek. AUS) Lampengehusesfehler. bzw. das Lampengehuse richtig an.
2 cycle Temperature error The projector is overheated. Move 2 Zyklus Temperaturfehler Der Projektor hat sich berhitzt. Stellen Sie
(0.5 sec ON, 0.5 sec OFF) the projector to a cooler location. 2 cycles Erreur de temprature Le projecteur est en surchauffe.
(0,5 sec ON, 0,5 sec OFF) Dplacer le projecteur dans un (0,5 Sek. AN, 0,5 Sek. AUS) den Projektor an einem khleren Platz auf.
4 cycle Fan error Fans will not work correctly. 4 Zyklus Lfterfehler Die Lfter arbeiten nicht
endroit plus frais.
(0.5 sec ON, 0.5 sec OFF) (0,5 Sek. AN, 0,5 Sek. AUS) ordnungegem.
4 cycles Erreur du ventilateur Les ventilateurs ne fonctionnement
6 cycle Lamp error Lamp fails to light. Wait a full minute 6 Zyklus Lampenfehler Die Lampe leuchtet nicht. Warten
(0,5 sec ON, 0,5 sec OFF) pas correctement.
(0.5 sec ON, 0.5 sec OFF) and then turn on again. (0,5 Sek. AN, 0,5 Sek. AUS) Sie eine Minute und schalten Sie
6 cycles Erreur de la lampe La lampe ne s'allume pas. Attendre
Green blinking Re-firing the lamp The projector is re-firing. (0,5 sec ON, 0,5 sec OFF) une bonne minute et ensuite das Gert dann wieder ein.
Steady light Orange Control key locked You have pressed control panel key rallumer le projecteur. Grnes Blinken gelesen werden Der Projektor aktiviert sich neu.
when Control Key Lock is enabled. Neuaktivierung der Lampe
Clignote en vert R-allumage de la lampe Le projecteur se rallume.
Anzeige Orange Tastensperre aktiviert Sie haben bei aktivierter Tastensperre
Voyant Orange Touche de commande Si la touche du panneau de commande a t
leuchtet eine Bedienfeldtaste gedrckt.
Lamp Indicator stationnaire verrouille enfonce lorsque le verrouillage de la touche
Indicator Condition Projector Condition Note de commande est activ.
Off Normal
Lampenanzeige
Blinking light Red Lamp has reached its end of life. Lamp replacement Replace the lamp. Voyant de la lampe Anzeige-Zustand Projektor-Zustand Hinweis
message will be displayed. Aus Normal
Condition du voyant Condition du projecteur Remarque
Steady light Red Lamp has been used beyond its limit. The projector will Replace the lamp. Anzeige blinkt Rot Die Lampe hat das Ende ihrer Lebensdauer erreicht. Die Tauschen Sie die
Eteint Normal
not turn on until the lamp is replaced. Lampenaustausch-Meldung wird angezeigt. Lampe aus.
Voyant Rouge La lampe a atteint la fin de sa dure d'utilisation. Remplacer la lampe.
Green Lamp mode is set to Eco mode Anzeige Rot Die zulssige Lampen-Betriebsstundenzahl wurde Tauschen Sie die
clignotant Le message de remplacement de la lampe s'affiche.
leuchtet berschritten. Der Projektor schaltet sich erst nach dem Lampe aus.
Voyant Rouge La lampe a t utilise au-del de ses limites. Le projecteur Remplacer la lampe.
Austausch der Lampe wieder ein.
Common Problems & Solutions (The numbers in the table refer to pages in the user's manual.) stationnaire ne s'allumera pas tant que la lampe n'a pas t change.
Grn Der Lampen-Modus ist auf Eco eingestellt.
Problem Check These Items Vert Le mode de la lampe est rgl sur le mode Eco.
Does not turn on Check that the power cable is plugged in and that the power button on the projector cabi-
Allgemeine Strungen & Abhilfemanahmen ( Die Zahlen in der Tabelle beziehen sich auf die Seitenzahlen im
befindlichen Bedienerhandbuch.
)
net or the remote control is on. See pages E-16 and 17. Rsolutions des problmes (Les numros du tableau renvoient aux pages du mode d'emploi.)
Ensure that the lamp cover or lamp housing is installed correctly. See page E-30. Problme Vrifier ces lments Strung berprfen Sie diese Punkte
Check to see if the projector has overheated or the lamp has reached the end of its usable Ne s'allume pas Vrifier que le cble d'alimentation est branch et que la touche d'alimentation du Der Projektor schaltet sich Stellen Sie sicher, dass das Netzkabel eingesteckt und die Netztaste am
life. If there is insufficient ventilation around the projector or if the room where you're pre- nicht ein Projektorgehuse oder auf der Fernbedienung gedrckt ist. Siehe Seiten G-16 und G-17.
projecteur ou de la tlcommande est active. Voir pages F-16 et 17.
senting is particularly warm, move the projector to a cooler location. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Lampenabdeckung bzw. das Lampengehuse richtig
S'assurer que le couvercle de la lampe ou le logement de la lampe est install
angebracht wurde. Siehe Seite G-30.
No picture Use the RGB, Video or S-Video button on the remote control or the cabinet to select your correctement. Voir page F-30.
berprfen Sie, ob sich der Projektor berhitzt hat oder ob die Lampe das Ende ihrer Lebensdauer
Vrifier si le projecteur est en surchauffe ou si la lampe a dpass sa fin de service. Si la
source (RGB, Video or S-Video). See page E-18. erreicht hat. Wenn die Belftung um den Projektor herum nicht ausreichend oder es im
ventilation autour du projecteur est insuffisante ou si la pice o la prsentation a lieu est
Ensure your cables are connected properly. Prsentationsraum besonders warm ist, sollten Sie den Projektor an einem khleren Ort aufstellen.
particulirement chaude, dplacer le projecteur dans un endroit plus frais.
Use menus to adjust the brightness and contrast. See page E-26. Kein Bild Whlen Sie mit der RGB, VIDEO oder S-VIDEO-Taste auf der Fernbedienung oder am
Remove the lens cap. Absence dimage Utiliser la touche RGB, VIDEO ou S-VIDEO de la tlcommande ou du coffret pour Projektor Ihre Quelle (RGB, Video oder S-Video) aus. Siehe Seite G-18.
Reset the settings or adjustments to factory preset levels using the Factory Default in the slectionner la source (RGB, Vido ou S-Vido). Voir page F-18. Stellen Sie sicher, dass Ihre Kabel richtig angeschlossen sind.
menu. See page E-29. Sassurer que les cbles sont connects correctement. Stellen Sie mit Hilfe der Mens die Helligkeit und den Kontrast ein. Siehe Seite G-26.
Utiliser les menus pour ajuster la luminosit et le contraste. Voir page F-26. Nehmen Sie die Linsenkappe ab.
Image isnt square to the Reposition the projector to improve its angle to the screen. See page E-18. Retirer le cache-objectif. Stellen Sie die Eingaben oder Einstellungen mit Hilfe von Werkseinstellung im Menu auf
screen Use the Keystone correction function to correct the trapezoid distortion. See page E-19. Remettre les rglages ou ajustements aux niveaux prrgls dorigine en utilisant le die jeweiligen Werkseinstellungen zurck. Siehe Seite G-29.
Picture is blurred Adjust the focus. See page E-19. rglage par dfaut du menu. Voir page F-29. Das Bild ist nicht rechtwinklig Positionieren Sie den Projektor neu, um dessen Winkel zum Bildschirm zu verbessern.
Reposition the projector to improve its angle to the screen. See page E-18. L'image n'est pas carre Repositionner le projecteur pour amliorer langle par rapport lcran. Voir page F-18. zum Bildschirm Siehe Seite G-18.
Ensure that the distance between the projector and screen is within the adjustment range l'cran Utiliser la fonction Keystone pour corriger la distorsion trapzodale. Voir page F-19. Korrigieren Sie die Trapezverzerrungen mit Hilfe der Trapez-Funktion. Siehe Seite G-19.
of the lens. See pages E-11 and 12. Das Bild ist verschwommen Stellen Sie das Objektiv scharf. Siehe Seite G-19.
Limage est floue Ajuster la mise au point. Voir page F-19.
Condensation may form on the lens if the projector is cold, brought into a warm place and Positionieren Sie den Projektor neu, um dessen Winkel zum Bildschirm zu verbessern.
Repositionner le projecteur pour amliorer langle par rapport lcran. Voir page F-18.
is then turned on. Should this happen, let the projector stand until there is no condensation Siehe Seite G-18.
Sassurer que la distance entre le projecteur et lcran est dans lintervalle de rglage de
Stellen Sie sicher, dass der Abstand zwischen Projektor und Bildschirm innerhalb des
on the lens. lobjectif. Voir pages F-11 et 12.
Einstellungsbereiches des Objektivs liegt. Siehe Seiten G-11 bis G-12.
Image is scrolling vertically, Use the RGB, VIDEO or S-VIDEO button on the remote control or the cabinet to select the Une condensation risque de se former sur l'objectif si le projecteur est froid, dplac dans
Kondensation kann sich auf der Linse bilden, wenn ein kalter Projektor in einen warmen
un endroit chaud et mis en marche.Si cela se produit, ne pas toucher le projecteur et
horizontally or both source you want to input. Raum gebracht und eingeschaltet wird. Sollte dies geschehen, lassen Sie den Projektor
attendre qu'il n'y ait plus de condensation sur l'objectif. so lange stehen, bis keine Kondensation mehr auf der Linse vorhanden ist.
Remote control does not work Install new batteries. See page E-10.
Limage dfile verticalement, Utiliser la touche RGB, VIDEO ou S-VIDEO de la tlcommande ou du coffret pour Das Bild scrollt vertikal, Whlen Sie mit der RGB, VIDEO oder S-VIDEO-Taste auf der Fernbedienung oder am
Make sure there are no obstacles between you and the projector. horizontalement ou dans les slectionner la source entrer. horizontal oder beides Projektor die einzugebende Quelle.
Stand within 22 feet (7 m) of the projector. See page E-10. deux sens. Die Fernbedienung funktioniert Legen Sie neue Batterien ein. Siehe Seite G-10.
Make sure that you are in the Projector mode and the PJ button lights in red. If not, press
La tlcommande ne Installer des piles neuves. Voir page F-10. nicht Stellen Sie sicher, dass sich zwischen Ihnen und dem Projektor keine Hindernisse befinden.
the PJ button. See page E-21.
fonctionne pas Sassurer quil ny a pas dobstacles entre vous et le projecteur. Betreiben Sie die Fernbedienung innerhalb eines Bereiches von 7 m zum Projektor.
Indicator is lit or blinking See the Power / Status / Lamp Indicator above. Se mettre 22 pieds (7 m) du projecteur. Voir page F-10. Siehe Seite G-10.
Sassurer que le projecteur est en mode projecteur et que le bouton PJ sallume en rouge. Stellen Sie sicher, dass der Projektor-Modus aktiviert ist und die PJ-Taste rot leuchtet.
Cross color in RGB mode If Auto Adjust is off, turn it on or adjust the image manually with Horizontal / Vertical /
Dans le cas contraire, appuyer sur le bouton PJ. Voir page F-21. Falls nicht, mssen Sie die PJ-Taste drcken. Siehe Seite G-21.
Clock / Phase in the Advanced menu. See page E-28.
Eine Anzeige leuchtet oder blinkt. Siehe oben stehende Netz- / Status- / Lampen-Anzeige.
Le voyant dtat est allum ou Voir le voyant alimentation / tat / lampe ci-dessus.
For more information contact your dealer. clignote Farbfehler im RGB-Modus Wenn Auto-Einstellung ausgeschaltet ist, schalten Sie es ein, oder stellen Sie das Bild mit Hilfe
von Horizontal / Vertikal / Takt / Phase in den Erweiterter manuell ein. Siehe Seite G-28.
Couleurs mlanges en mode Si le rglage automatique est dsactiv, l'activer ou ajuster l'image manuellement avec
RGB Horizontal / Vertical / Horloge / Phase dans lAvanc. Voir page F-28. Einzelheiten erfragen Sie bitte bei Ihrem Fachhndler.
Pour plus dinformations prendre contact avec votre revendeur.

Questa sezione vi aiuta a risolvere eventuali problemi che sorgono durante limpostazione Esta seccin le ayuda a resolver eventuales problemas que puede tener al ajustar o utilizar el Det hr avsnittet beskriver hur du tgrdar problem som kan uppkomma under installationen
o luso del proiettore. proyector. och anvndningen av projektorn.
Indicatore POWER Indicador de alimentacin Driftindikator
Condizione dellindicatore Condizione del proiettore Nota Condicin del indicador Condicin del proyector Nota Indikatorlge Projektorlge Anmrkning
Spento E spenta la corrente principale. Apagado La alimentacin principal est desconectada. Av Huvudstrmmen r frnslagen.
Spia Lampeggia di verde (0,5 sec ON, 0,5 sec OFF) Il proiettore pronto per laccensione. Attendere prego. Luz Parpadea de color verde (0,5 seg. ENCENDIDO, 0,5 seg. APAGADO,) El proyector se est preparando para encenderse. Espere unos instantes. Blinkar Blinkar grnt (0,5 sek P, 0,5 sek AV) Projektorn hller p att sttas igng. Vnta en stund.
lampeggiante Lampeggia di arancione (0,5 sec ON, 0,5 sec OFF) Il proiettore in fase di raffreddamento. Attendere prego. intermitente Parpadea de color naranja (0,5 seg. ENCENDIDO, 0,5 seg. APAGADO) El proyector se est enfriando. Espere unos instantes. Blinkar orange (0,5 sek P, 0,5 sek AV) Projektorn hller p att svalna. Vnta en stund.
Spia Verde Il proiettore acceso. Luz fija Verde El proyector est encendido. Lyser Grn Projektorn r pslagen.
illuminata Arancione Il proiettore si trova nel modo dattesa. Naranja El proyector se encuentra en modo de konstant Orange Projektorn str i Standby.
espera.
Indicatore dello stato Statusindikator
Condizione dellindicatore Condizione del proiettore Nota Indicador de estado Indikatorlge Projektorlge Anmrkning
Spento Normale Condicin del indicador Condicin del proyector Nota Av Normal
Spia Lampeggia 1 ciclo (0,5 sec acceso ON, Errore del coprilampada o del Sostituite il coprilampada o lalloggiamento Apagado Normal Blinkar Blinkar rtt 1 cykel Lamphusfel eller Byt lampkpan eller lamphuset
lampeggiante di rosso 2,5 sec spento OFF) alloggiamento della lampada. della lampada correttamente. Luz Parpadea de 1 ciclos (0,5 seg. ENCENDIDO, Error de la cubierta de la lmpara Reemplace correctamente la cubierta de (0,5 sek P, 2,5 sek AV) tckplattafel. korrekt.
2 ciclo (0,5 sec acceso ON, Errore della temperatura Il proiettore surriscaldato.Spostate intermitente color rojo 2,5 seg. APAGADO) y error de la lmpara hasta. la lmpara o la carcasa de la lmpara. 2 cykler Temperaturfel Projektorn r verhettad. Flytta
0,5 sec spento OFF) il proiettore in un luogo pi fresco. 2 ciclos (0,5 seg. ENCENDIDO, Error de temperatura El proyector se ha recalentado. Traslade (0,5 sek P, 0,5 sek AV) projektorn till en svalare plats.
4 ciclo (0,5 sec acceso ON, Errore del ventilatore I ventilatori non funzionano 0,5 seg. APAGADO) el proyector a un lugar ms fresco. 4 cykler Flktfel Flktarna fungerar inte ordentligt.
0,5 sec spento OFF) correttamente. 4 ciclos (0,5 seg. ENCENDIDO, Error de ventilador Los ventiladores no funcionan (0,5 sek P, 0,5 sek AV)
6 ciclo (0,5 sec acceso ON, Errore della lampada La lampada non si illumina. Aspettate 0,5 seg. APAGADO) correctamente. 6 cykler Lampfel Lampan tnds inte. Vnta en hel
0,5 sec spento OFF) un minuto intero, poi riaccendete l'unit. 6 ciclos (0,5 seg. ENCENDIDO, Error de la lmpara La lmpara no se enciende. Espere un
(0,5 sek P, 0,5 sek AV) minut och stt sedan p lampdata
Lampeggia di verde Riaccensione della lampada Il proiettore si riaccende. 0,5 seg. APAGADO) minuto completo y luego vuelva a
Blinkar grnt Projektorn tnder lampan.
Spia Arancione Tasto di controllo bloccato Avete premuto il tasto sul pannello di encenderla.
Lyser Orange Tnder om lampan Du har tryckt p en tangent medan Con-
illuminata controllo quando abilitato il blocco del Parpadea de color verde Reecendiendo la lmpara El proyector se vuelve a encender.
Luz fija Naranja Tecla del panel de control Ha pulsado una tecla del panel de konstant Kontrollpanelen lst trol Key Lock var aktiverat.
tasto di controllo.
bloqueada control cuando la funcin de bloqueo
de las teclas est habilitada. Lampindikator
Indicatore della lampada Indikatorlge Projektorlge Anmrkning
Condizione dellindicatore Condizione del proiettore Nota Indicador de lmpara Av Normal
Spento Normale
Condicin del indicador Condicin del proyector Nota Blinkar Rd Lampan har ntt slutet av sin livslngd. Meddelandet Byt lampan.
Spia Rosso La lampada ha raggiunto la fine della sua vita di servizio. Sostituite la lampada. om att byta lampan visas.
Apagado Normal
lampeggiante Appare sul display il messaggio di sostituzione della lampada. Lyser Rd Lampan har anvnts lngre tid n rekommenderat. Byt lampan.
Luz Rojo La lmpara ha llegado al trmino de su vida til. Se visualiza el Reemplace la lmpara.
Spia Rosso La lampada stata usata oltre i limiti. Il proiettore non Sostituite la lampada. konstant Projektorn stts inte p frrn lampan har bytts.
intermitente mensaje de reemplazo de la lmpara.
illuminata saccender fino alla sostituzione della lampada. Grn Lamplget stlls in p Eco-lge.
Luz fija Rojo Se ha sobrepasado el lmite de uso de la lmpara. El proyector Reemplace la lmpara.
Verde La lampada impostata sulla modalit Eco. no se encender hasta que la lmpara sea reemplazada.
Verde La lmpara se encuentra en el modo Eco. Vanliga problem och tgrder (Siffrorna i tabellen hnvisar till motsvarande sidor i bruksanvisningen.)
Comuni problemi e soluzioni (I numeri della tabella riguardano le pagine nel manuale delle istruzioni.)
Problem Kontrollera fljande punkter
Problema Controllate queste voci Problemas comunes y sus soluciones (Los nmeros que aparecen en la tabla indican pginas del manual del usuario.)
Gr inte att stta p Kontrollera att ntsladden r ansluten och att strmbrytaren p projektorn eller
Non si accende la corrente Controllate che il cavo dalimentazione sia collegato e che acceso il tasto daccensione Problema Compruebe los siguientes puntos fjrrkontrollen r p. Se sid W-16 och 17.
sullinvolucro del proiettore o sul telecomando. Fate riferimento alle pagine I-16 e 17. Kontrollera att lampkpan och lamphuset r rtt installerade. Se sid W-30.
El proyector no se enciende Compruebe que el cable de alimentacin est conectado y que el botn de alimentacin del
Assicuratevi che il coprilampada o lalloggiamento della lampada siano installati
proyector o del mando a distancia est activado. Consulte la pgina S-16 y 17. Kontrollera om projektorn har verhettats eller om lampan har ntt slutet av sin livslngd.
correttamente. Fate riferimento alla pagina I-30.
Asegrese que la cubierta o la carcasa de la lmpara se instalan correctamente. Consulte Om ventilationen kring projektorn r dlig eller om presentationsrummet r mycket varmt,
Controllate se il proiettore surriscaldato o se la lampada ha raggiunto la fine della sua
la pgina S-30. ska du prova att flytta projektorn till en svalare plats.
durata utile. Se sufficiente la ventilazione intorno al proiettore o se la stanza in cui vi
Compruebe si el proyector se ha calentado en exceso o si la lmpara ha alcanzado el final
trovate particolarmente calda, spostate il proiettore in un luogo pi fresco. Ingen bild Anvnd RBG, VIDEO eller S-VIDEO-tangenten p fjrrkontrollen eller projektorn fr att
de su vida til. Si no hay suficiente ventilacin alrededor del proyector o si la habitacin en
Nessunimmagine Usate il tasto della RGB, VIDEO o S-VIDEO sul telecomando o sullinvolucro per vlja klla (RGB, Video eller S-Video). Se sid W-18.
que est realizando la presentacin es particularmente calurosa, traslade el proyector a un
selezionare la fonte (RGB, Video o S-Video). Fate riferimento alla pagina I-18. Se efter att kablarna r rtt anslutna.
lugar ms fresco.
Assicuratevi che i cavi siano collegati correttamente. Anvnd menyerna fr att justera ljusstyrkan och kontrasten. Se sid W-26.
No hay imagen Use el botn RGB, VIDEO o S-VIDEO del mando a distancia o del proyector para Ta bort linsskyddet.
Usate i men per regolare la luminosit e il contrasto. Fate riferimento alla pagina I-26.
seleccionar la fuente (RGB, Vdeo o S-Vdeo). Consulte la pgina S-18.
Togliete il coprilente. Nollstll instllningarna eller justeringarna till fabriksinstllningarna med hjlp av Factory
Asegrese de que los cables estn conectados correctamente.
Ripristinate le impostazioni o le regolazioni ai valori di fabbrica usando la funzione Default di Default p Meny. Se sid W-29.
Use los mens para ajustar el brillo y el contraste. Consulte la pgina S-26.
fabbrica nel men. Fate riferimento alla pagina I-29. Bilden r inte fyrkantig Flytta projektorn fr att f en bttre vinkel mot duken. Se sid W-18.
Quite la tapa del objetivo.
Limmagine non quadrata Cambiate la posizione del proiettore per migliorare il suo angolo rispetto allo schermo. Fate Devuelva las configuraciones o ajustes a los valores predeterminados de fbrica utilizando Anvnd funktionen Keystone fr att korrigera den trapetsformade frvrngningen. Se sid
rispetto allo schermo riferimento alla pagina I-18. la funcin ajustes de fbrica del men. Consulte la pgina S-29. W-19.
Usate la funzione Chiave per correggere la deformazione trapezoidale. Fate riferimento alla
La imagen no aparece Mueva el proyector para mejorar el ngulo de ste respecto de la pantalla. Consulte la Bilden r oskarp Justera fokus. Se sid W-19.
pagina I-19.
rectangular en la pantalla pgina S-18. Flytta projektorn fr att f en bttre vinkel mot duken. Se sid W-18.
Limmagine sfuocata Regolate il fuoco. Fate riferimento alla pagina I-19. Use la funcin Keystone para corregir la distorsin trapezoidal. Consulte la pgina S-19. Kontrollera att avstndet mellan projektorn och duken ligger inom linsens
Cambiate la posizione del proiettore per migliorare il suo angolo rispetto allo schermo. Fate
La imagen se ve borrosa Ajuste el enfoque. Consulte la pgina S-19. justeringsomrde. Se sid W-11-12.
riferimento alla pagina I-18.
Mueva el proyector para mejorar el ngulo de ste respecto de la pantalla. Consulte la pgina S-18. Det kan bildas kondens p projektorns lins om projektorn r kall, tas till en varm plats och
Assicuratevi che la distanza tra il proiettore e lo schermo sia allinterno del campo di
Asegrese de que la distancia entre el proyector y la pantalla est dentro del margen de sedan stts p. Om det intrffar ska du lta projektorn st tills kondensen p linsen
regolazione dellobiettivo. Fate riferimento alla pagine I-11 e 12.
ajuste del objetivo. Consulte la pgina S-11 y 12. frsvinner.
Si pu formare della condensa sull'obiettivo se il proiettore freddo viene portato in un luogo
Si se enciende el proyector luego de trasladarlo desde un lugar fro a uno caluroso, puede
riscaldato e poi acceso. In tal caso, lasciate che la condensa evapori dall'obiettivo nel Bilden rullar vertikalt, Anvnd RBG, VIDEO eller S-VIDEO-tangenten p fjrrkontrollen eller projektorn fr att
producirse condensacin en el objetivo. Si esto sucediera, deje el proyector reposar hasta
proiettore senza usare quest'ultimo. horisontellt eller bdadera vlja nskad klla.
que ya no haya condensacin en el objetivo.
Limmagine scorre Usate il tasto della RGB, VIDEO o S-VIDEO sul telecomando o sullinvolucro per Fjrrkontrollen fungerar inte Stt i nya batterier. Se sid W-10.
La imagen se desplaza Use el botn RGB, VIDEO o S-VIDEO del mando a distancia o del proyector para
verticalmente, orizzontalmente selezionare la fonte da inviare. Se till att den inte finns ngra hinder mellan dig och projektorn.
verticalmente, horizontalmente seleccionar la fuente que desea usar.
o in entrambe le direzioni Se till att du befinner dig hgst 22 fot (7 m) frn projektorn. Se sid W-10.
o en ambas direcciones
Non funziona il telecomando Installate nuove batterie. Fate riferimento alla pagina I-10. Kontrollera att projektorn r i projektor-lge eller att PJ-tangenten lyser rtt. Tryck annars
El mando a distancia no Instale pilas nuevas. Consulte la pgina S-10.
Assicuratevi che non ci siano degli ostacoli tra voi e il proiettore. p PJ-tangenten. Se sid W-21.
funciona Compruebe que no hay obstculos entre usted y el proyector.
State ad una distanza di 22 piedi (7 m) dal proiettore. Fate riferimento alla pagina I-10.
Prese a una distancia de mximo 22 pies (7 m) del proyector. Consulte la pgina S-10. Indikatorn lyser eller blinkar Se Drift / Status / Lampindikatorn ovan.
Assicuratevi che sia stato attivato la modalit Proiettore e il tasto PJ s'illumina in rosso. Nel
Asegrese de que se encuentra en el modo de proyector y que el botn PJ se ilumina de
caso contrario, premete il tasto PJ. Fate riferimento alla pagina I-21. verlappande frger i RGB- Om Autokalibrering r av ska du stta p den eller justera bilden manuellt med Horisontell /
color rojo. Si no es as, pulse el botn PJ. Consulte la pgina S-21.
L'findicatore illuminato o Vedere lindicatore di accensione / stato / lampada sopra. lge Vertikal / Klocka / Fas under Avanceradmeny. Se sid W-28.
El indicador est Consulte el indicador de Alimentacin / Estado / Lmpara (arriba).
lampeggia
encendido o parpadea Kontakta din terfrsljare fr nrmare information.
Colori trasversali nel modo Se disattivata la funzione Auto Adjust, attivatela e o regolate l'immagine manualmente con Los colores se mezclan en el Si la funcin Ajuste automtico est desactivada, actvela o ajuste la imagen manualmente
RGB Orizzontale / Verticale / Orologio / Fase nelle Avanzato. Fate riferimento alla pagina I-28. modo RGB utilizando la opcin Horizontal / Vertial / Reloj / Fase de Avanzado. Consulte la pgina S-28.
Rivolgetevi al vostro rivenditore per ulteriori informazioni.
Para ms informacin, consulte a su distribuidor.
TROUBLESHOOTING
1. Operation check
A certain degree of malfunction can be identified by making an operation check carried out in normally operating
conditions.
Prior to the removal of the top cover, the following checks should be carried out:.

Is the POWER indicator lit in orange in the standby state?

NO The power cord is disconnected.


The vacation switch is turned OFF.
The fuse (F201) of the D2398M1 PWB has blown out.
The cable (between D2398M1/CN201 ~ D2398M2/CN2) is disconnected.
The cable (between D2398M2/CN101 ~ MAIN PWB/POPW) is disconnected.
The power block is out of order. (No supply of VCCS + 3.3V or VCCS + 6.2V).
The fuses (F4001 ~ F4005) of the MAIN PWB have blown out.
Problems in the CPU peripheral circuits of the MAIN PWB.
YES
Is the STATUS indicator flashing in red in the standby state?

YES [Flashing once every 3 seconds] Dislodgment of the lamp cover


[Flashing twice every 4 seconds] Internal temperature error. The working con-
dition range is exceeded.
[Flashing 4 times every 6 seconds] Fan stoppage due to fan error or intrusion
of foreign substance. No insertion of the fan cable.
[Flashing 6 times every 8 seconds] Failure in lamp lighting. The cable POLC
is disconnected.
NO
Is the LAMP indicator lit in red in the standby state?

YES Lamps life or the replacement extension time has been exceeded. The sys-
tem cannot be started in this state.
Replace the lamp.
NO
Is the LAMP indicator flashing in red in the standby or power-ON state?

YES [Flashing once per second]


Lamps life has expired. During the replacement extension time (100H) and
the expiration of lamps life.
Replace the lamp.
NO
Is the POWER indicator lit in green in the power-ON state?

YES The MAIN PWB is out of order.


The cable is disconnected.
The LCD panel is out of order.
NO
Circuits are out of order around the cabinet switch, remote control, light receiving block of the remote control, and
the CPU.

4-1
TROUBLESHOOTING

2. Power block
The trouble in the power-related circuits can cause malfunction such as the failure in picture presentation, lamp
lighting, fan revolution, etc. When a trouble occurs, examine if this trouble is arising from the power block and then
check it.
Confirm that the voltages specified below are output to the POPW and POLC connectors of the MAIN PWB.
POPW
PIN No. Signal name Stand-by mode Power-ON mode Related circuits
1 S3.4V +3.4V +3.4V CPU, video processing, video input
2 S3.4V +3.4V +3.4V CPU, video processing, video input
3 S3.4V +3.4V +3.4V CPU, video processing, video input
4 GND GND GND GND
5 GND GND GND GND
6 GND GND GND GND
7 S6.2V +6.2V +6.2V Sync separation, RGB-OUT, audio AMP
8 S6.2V +6.2V +6.2V Sync separation, RGB-OUT, audio AMP
9 GND GND GND GND
10 GND GND GND GND
11 S+14.0V +14.0V +14.0V Fan driver, audio processor, buffer circuit
12 S+14.0V +14.0V +14.0V Fan driver, audio processor, buffer circuit
13 GND GND GND GND
14 S17.0V +17.0V +17.0V LCD driver, fan driver
15 GND GND GND GND

POLC
PIN No. Signal name Stand-by mode Power-ON mode Related circuits
1 LAMP_DET +3.4V 0V Detection of lamp lighting
2 GND GND GND GND
3 +3.4V +3.4V +3.4V
4 LAMP_PW 0V +3.4V Lamp lighting control
ECO 0V
5 LAMP_CTL 0V Lamp mode control
NORMAL +3.4V

4-2
TROUBLESHOOTING

If there is no voltage output at POPW/POLC, check the power block in the procedures specified below.

Is an AC input available at CN2 of the PS PWB?

NO SW201 (vacation switch) is OFF, F201 (fuse) blows out, or the AC input termi-
nal or the CN2 connector has poor connections.
YES
Is there F201 (fuse) OFF in the PS PWB?

YES Replace the fuse.


NO
Is there a DC output of about 370V (300V ~ 390V) at CN1 (connected to the BALLAST PWB) of the PS PWB?

NO The PS PWB is out of order. The CN1 connector poor connections.


YES
Is there ignition sound to lit up the lamp?

NO The BALLAST PWB is out of order.


YES
Any circuit other than the BALLAST PWB is out of order (lamp broken).

4-3
TROUBLESHOOTING

3. I/O. sync, and ADC blocks


3-1. No presentation of video images (for Video/CV inputs)

1 Is the digital signal available at both ends of FR3000 ~ FR3003?

YES Check IC5004 or peripheral circuits. Write in the data again.


NO
2 Is the input signal for S-VIDEO?

YES Go to 5.
NO
3 Is a signal available at TP3001 (CV signal)? Check the relevant circuit diagram for waveforms.

YES Check IC3000 or the peripheral circuits. Write in the data again.
NO
4 Is a signal available at FL1009 (CV signal)?

NO Check the signals of external video output equipment.

YES Investigate the terminal M1002 or peripheral circuits. Inadequate installation.

5 Are signals available at TP3000 (SVchroma signal) and TP3002 (SVbrightness signal)? Check the relevant
circuit diagram for waveforms.

YES Check IC3000 or the peripheral circuits. Write in the data again.
NO
6 Are signals available at FL1008 (SVchroma signal) and FL1007 (SVbrightness signal)?

NO Check the signals of external video output equipment.

YES Investigate the terminal M1001 or peripheral circuits. Inadequate installation.

4-4
TROUBLESHOOTING

3-2. No presentation of RGB/Component images (for Video/D-Sub inputs)

1 Is the digital signal available at both ends of R2102 ~ R2125?

YES Check IC5004 or the peripheral circuits. Write in the data again.
NO
2 Is the input signal for 525i (Component)?

YES Go to 6.
NO
3 Are signals available at TP2002 (Rch), TP2003 (Gch), and TP2004 (Bch)?

YES Check IC2002 or the peripheral circuits. Write in the data again.
NO
4 Are signals available at C1033 (Rch), C1034 (Gch), and C1035 (Bch)?

YES Investigate the LPF circuit (Q2003, Q2004, etc.).


NO
5 Are signals available at Pins 10/12/14 of POIB?

NO Investigate the terminal M201. Check the signals of external video output
equipment.

YES Investigate the installation of parts in FL1001, FL1002, and FL1003.

6 Are signals available at R3014 (Cr), R3015 (Cb), and R3016 (Y)? Check the relevant circuit diagram for
waveforms.

NO Investigate the peripheral circuits of Q3000, Q3001, and Q3002.

YES Go to 4.

3-3. No presentation of video images (for Sync/CV inputs)

1 Is the horizontal sync signal available at R5011?

NO Go to 3, 3-1 No presentation of video images (for Video/CV inputs).


YES
2 Is the vertical sync signal available at R5006?

NO Go to 3, 3-1 No presentation of video images (for Video/CV inputs).

YES Check IC5004 or the peripheral circuits. Write in the data again.

4-5
TROUBLESHOOTING

3-4. No presentation of video images (for Sync/D-Sub inputs)

1 Is the input signal for 525i (Component)?

YES Go to $.
NO
2 Is the horizontal sync signal available at Pin 8 of IC2004?

YES Go to 0.
NO
3 Is the horizontal sync signal available at Pin 15 of IC2001?

YES Check IC2004 or the peripheral circuits.


NO
4 Is the inut signal for Sync on Green?

YES Go to 8.
NO
5 Is the horizontal sync signal available at Pin 6 of IC2001?

YES Check IC2001 or the peripheral circuits.


NO
6 Is the horizontal sync signal available at C2047?

YES Check Q2030 or the peripheral circuits.


NO
7 Is the horizontal sync signal available at Pin 16 of POIB?

NO Investigate the terminal M201. Check the signals of external video output
equipment.

YES Investigate the installation of parts in FL1004.

8 Is the SOG signal available at Pin 4 of IC2001?

YES Investigate IC2001 or the peripheral circuits.


NO
9 Is the SOG signal available at R2001?

NO Go to 5, 3-2. No presentation of RGB/Component images (for Video/D-Sub


inputs).

YES Investigate Q2001 or the peripheral circuits.

4-6
TROUBLESHOOTING

0 Is the vertical sync signal available at Pin 13 of IC2001?

YES Check IC5004 or the peripheral circuits. Write in the data again.
NO
! Is the vertical sync signal available at Pin 8 of IC2001?

YES Check IC2001 or the peripheral circuits.


NO
@ Is the vertical sync signal available at C2049?

YES Check Q2031 or the peripheral circuits.


NO
# Is the vertical sync signal available at Pin 18 of POIB?

NO Investigate the terminal M201. Check the signals of external video output
equipment.

YES Investigate the installation of parts in FL1005.

$ Is the horizontal sync signal available at R5011?

NO Go to 6, 3-2. No presentation of RGB/Component images (for Video/D-Sub


inputs).
YES
% Is the vertical sync signal available at R5006?

NO Go to 6, 3-2. No presentation of RGB/Component images (for Video/D-Sub


inputs).

YES Investigate IC5004 or the peripheral circuits. Write in the data again.

3-5. No presentation of RGB-OUT (Video system)

1 Are signals available at FL1010 (Rch), FL1011 (Gch), and FL1012 (Bch)?

YES Investigate the installation of parts in FL1010, FL1011, and FL1012.


NO
2 Are signals available at Pin 13 (Rch), Pin 11 (Gch), and Pin 9 (Bch) of IC1002?

YES Investigate IC1002 or the peripheral circuits.


NO
3 Are signals available at Pins 10/12/14 of POIB?

NO Investigate the terminal M201. Check the signals of external video output
equipment.

YES Investigate the installation of parts in FL1001, FL1002, and FL1003.


4-7
TROUBLESHOOTING

3-6. No generation of sound (audio system)

1 Are audio signals available at Pins 1/2 of POSP?

NO Disconnection in speaker cotton-covered wires, cables, or connectors.


YES
2 Are audio signals available at Pin 5 of IC4014?

YES Check IC4014 or the peripheral circuits.


NO
3 What input is selected at present?

RGB Go to 4
VIDEO Go to 5
S- VIDEO Go to 6

4 Are audio signals available at Pins 1/30 of IC4005?

NO Investigate the terminal M203. Check the external audio output equipment.

YES Investigate IC4005 or the peripheral circuits.

5 Are audio signals available at Pins 2/29 of IC4005?

NO Investigate the terminal M1003. Check the external audio output equipment.

YES Investigate IC4005 or the peripheral circuits.

6 Are audio signals available at Pins 3/28 of IC4005?

NO Investigate the terminal M1003. Check the external audio output equipment.

YES Investigate IC4005 or the peripheral circuits.

4-8
TROUBLESHOOTING

4. LCD driver block


4-1. VT560/660 (PWB-4541)

Are the signal outputs specified below generated from IC9001, IC9002, and IC9003? (See the waveform dia-
grams.)

Pin Nos.
IC9001 26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36 Rch Video signals (10Vp-p)
IC9002 26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36 Gch Video signals (10Vp-p)
IC9003 26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36 Bch Video signals (10Vp-p)

NO IC9001, IC9002, or IC9003 is out of order.


IC9007/IC9008 or the peripheral circuits are out of order.
YES
Are the signal inputs specified below entered in POPR, POPG, or POPB? (See the waveform diagrams.)

Pin Nos.
2 Y shift register start pulse (DY)
3, 4 Y shift register transfer clock (CLY, CLYB)
8 Pre-charge pulse (NRG)
9, 10, 11, 12 Enable pulse (ENB1, ENB2, ENB3, ENB4)
13 X driver driving direction changeover (DIRX)
14, 15 X shift register transfer clock (CLX, CLXB)
17 X shift register start pulse (DX)
27 Y driver driving direction changeover (DIRY)
6, 26 Panels opposing electrode potential (LCCOM)

NO Data are destroyed.


IC9501/IC9502/IC9503 or the peripheral circuits are out of order.
IC8002 or the peripheral circuits are out of order.
YES
The LCD panel is out of order.
Cables are disconnected (POPR/POPG/POPB).
Inadequate installation of connectors (POPR/POPG/POPB).

4-9
TROUBLESHOOTING

4-2. VT460 (PWB-4546)

Are the signal outputs specified below generated from IC9001, IC9002, and IC9003? (See the waveform dia-
grams.)

Pin Nos.
IC9001 18, 20, 22, 27, 29, 31 Rch Video signals (10Vp-p)
IC9002 18, 20, 22, 27, 29, 31 Gch Video signals (10Vp-p)
IC9003 18, 20, 22, 27, 29, 31 Bch Video signals (10Vp-p)

NO IC9001, IC9002, or IC9003 is out of order.


IC9007/IC9008 or the peripheral circuits are out of order.
YES
Are the signal inputs specified below entered in PORS, POGS, or POBS? (See the waveform diagrams.)

Pin Nos.
1 Uniformity improving signal (PSIG)
9 H shift register driving direction (RGT)
10 Uniformity improving signal (CLR)
13 H shift register driving start pulse (HST)
14, 15 H shift register driving clock (HCK1, HCK2)
18 Gate select pulse enable (ENB)
19 V shift register driving clock (VCK)
20 V shift register driving start pulse (VST)
21 Uniformity improving pulse (PCG)
22 V shift register driving direction (DWN)
24 Panels opposing electrode potential (COM)

NO Data are destroyed.


IC9501/IC9502/IC9503/IC9504/ IC9505/IC9506 or the peripheral circuits are
out of order.
IC8002 or the peripheral circuits are out of order.
YES
The LCD panel is out of order.
Cables are disconnected (PORS/POGS/POBS).
Inadequate installation of connectors (PORS/POGS/POBS).

4-10
TROUBLESHOOTING

5. Auto-trapezoid corrector block


This section is related to fault diagnosis for screen displays, in particular, for auto-trapezoid correction.

[Symptom] As illustrated below, the keystone correction results in MAX fixing conditions.

or

[Confirmation]
* Confirmation should be done in the state that the PWB is placed horizontally.

1 In the state that the PWB is placed horizontally, is a voltage output of about 1.25V available at Pin 5 of
IC7002?

NO IC7002 or the peripheral circuits are out of order.


YES
2 Is a voltage output of about 1.25V available at Pin 1 of IC7003?

NO IC7003 or the peripheral circuits are out of order.


YES
3 Is the setting normal for Menu, Image, AutoKeystone, Keystone, and KeystoneSave?

NO Re-adjustment of the horizontality


* Adjustment of the horizontality:
This adjustment is carried out each time output setting is made for the hori-
zontal condition of auto-trapezoid correction control and detection IC (IC7002).
YES
Another setting

4-11
TROUBLESHOOTING

Picture quality judgment standard


1. Convergence
Check the convergence by means of a cross hatch signal.
(1) Pixel displacement
The amount of pixel displacement of red and blue against green throughout the entire screen area shall be
as specified below.
1 pixel or less
In other words, there shall be no separation of all pixels of red, green, and blue throughout the entire screen
area.
If the above-mentioned pixel displacement is found to be defective, then,
1 Replace the OPT BASE ASSY, provided that an irregular color compensator jig is available.
After replacement, make adjustments by means of the irregular color compensator and the PC control
software.
2 Replace the ENGINE SASSY (SERVICE), if the irregular color compensator jig is not available.
After replacement, write the data of the floppy disc that is attached to the ENGINE SASSY (SERVICE).

2. Foreign substances (dust, flaws), pixel defects (bright dots and dark dots)
Enter the signal inputs of all black, all white, all red, all green, and all blue.
(1) Foreign substances (dust, flaws)
Foreign substances shall be considered of no problem if the pixels are correctly focused but such foreign
substances cannot be seen at a distance of 2 meters from the screen. They shall be counted as the dark
dots if they can be perceived in the unit of pixels. The foreign substances, which can be seen vaguely (not
in the unit of pixels) but cannot be removed, shall be identified in accordance with the standard (size) below
in the state that they are correctly focused.
Standard: Green : For 3 to less than 6 pixels: OK up to 1 position, NG for 6 pixels or more
Red : For 3 to less than 8 pixels: OK up to 1 position, NG for 8 pixels or more
Blue : For 3 to less than 10 pixels: OK up to 1 position, NG for 10 pixels or more
(No problem in case of less than 3 pixels in each color; NG in case of 3 pixels or more in 2 positions)
In the case of NG for above due to foreign substances (dust), such foreign substances (dust) shall be
removed.

(2) Bright dots in high brightness


Bright dots in high brightness shall be defined as a defect that can be seen clearly at a distance of 2 meters
when a 4% ND filter is placed between the projector lens and the screen.
Standard: Red : 2 dots or less
Green : 1 dots or less
Blue : 5 dots or less

(3) Bright dots in low brightness


Bright dots in low brightness shall be defined as a defect that can be seen clearly at a distance of 2 meters
when a 12.5% ND filter is placed between the projector lens and the screen. (OK if they cannot be seen
clearly)
Standard: Red : 6 dots or less
Green : 4 dots or less
Blue : No problem

(4) Dark dots


6 dots or less for red, green, and blue, respectively.
In the case of NG for (2) bright dots in high brightness, (3) bright dots in low brightness, and (4) dark dots,
replace the OPT BASE ASSY or the ENGINE SASSY (SERVICE).

4-12
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
- Table of Contents -

1. Outline software descriptions

2. Equipment and operating environment

3. Auto-adjust software installation procedures for Sub-Brightness and Sub-


Contrast
3-1. Installation
3-2. Personal computer setting
For Win95 / 98 / ME
For Win2000
For WinXP

4. Setting items for DATA writing

5. Repair and adjustment procedures


5-1. Replacement of the MAIN PWB
5-2. Replacement of the LCD panel (Replacement of the OPT BASE ASSY)

6. Various functional descriptions


6-1. Setting
6-2. DATA
6-3. ADJ
6-3-1. Sub B/C
6-3-2. Flicker
6-3-3. Ghost
6-3-4. Vline
6-3-5. Conver
6-3-6. Lamp
6-4. Auto-adjust position change

7. Error messages
7-1. Errors appearing when the servicing adjustment software is used
7-2. Errors appearing when the auto-adjust software for Sub-Brightness and Sub-
Contrast is used

5-1
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

1. Outline software descriptions


This is the PC control software for servicing adjustments to be conducted during the replacement of the MAIN
PWB or the LCD panel for the LCD projector, the VT460/560/660 Series.
This software makes it possible to perform the following adjustments:
Adjustment of Sub-Brightness and Sub-Contrast (Auto or Manual)
Adjustment of Flicker
Adjustment of Ghost
Adjustment of Vline
Adjustment of Convergence
Modification of usage time for the Lamp, Filter, Panel, and Projector
READ/WRITE of various PJ DATA
[ADJ Data (Sub-Brightness/Sub-Contrast, Flicker, Ghost, Vline, Convergence), V-T data, Uniformity
Data, Color Correction Data, various usage time DATA (Lamp, Filter, Panel, Projector), All DATA (all
Flash Data including factory adjustment data)]

* In order to accomplish the automatic adjustment of Sub-Brightness/Sub-Contrast, it is necessary to install


an appropriate auto-adjust software.
(Refer to 3. Installation Procedures for Sub-Brightness/Sub-Contrast Auto-Adjust Software.)
* In the VT60 System, FlashUPGrader.exe is used when writing the result of each adjustment (or each DATA
item) in the PJ.
(Refer to 4. Setting Procedures for DATA Writing, and set up FlashUPGrader.exe in the designated folder.)
* The servicing ADJ software should be closed each time one unit has been adjusted. To make adjustments for
the next unit, the software should be started from the beginning. If the software is not closed, the previous
adjusting data may remain.

2. Equipment to be used and environment


<Equipment to be used>
Service ADJ software (Ser VT460_560_660ver***.exe ***: Version title)
* The auto-adjust software for Sub-Brightness/Sub-Contrast can be started from this Service ADJ software.
Once it is installed, it is unnecessary to start up the auto-adjust software for Sub-Brightness/Sub-Contrast.
* It is necessary to start up this Service ADJ software when writing the result of each adjustment (or each data
item) in the PJ. If operation is executed according to 4. Setting Procedures for Data Writing, it is unnecessary
to start up FlashUPGrader.exe.
Personal computer [Enabled to actuate Windows2000/98/95 or Windows3.1, and the serial port (any one of
COM1 COM5) is available and of the D-SUB 9-pin.]
RGB signal generator (Auto-adjustment type: Enabled to generate an output of a black window against all
white of SVGA during VT460 adjustment and XGA during VT560/660 adjustment)
* In addition to the RGB signal generator, output can also be generated from the ANALOG RGB output circuit.
Video signal generator [Auto-adjustment type: Enabled to generate an output of NTSC split color bars (7
colors)]
Component signal generator [Auto-adjustment type: Enabled to generate an output of 15kHz Component
Video 60Hz split color bars (7 colors)]
Serial cable (Accessory for the PJ main unit)

<Method of connection>
Connect the PC CONTROL terminal (Mini DIN-8pin) of the PJ with either serial port of COM1 COM5 (D-SUB
9pin) of the personal computer through a serial cable (accessory for the PJ main unit).
During the adjustment of RGB Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast, connect the RGB terminal of the PJ with an
ANALOG RGB output of the personal computer or an RGB signal generator to be used for adjusting signal
generation.
During the adjustment of Component Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast, connect the RGB terminal of the PJ
with a Component signal generator to be used for adjusting signal generation.
During the adjustment of Video Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast, connect the VIDEO terminal with a Video
signal generator to be used for adjusting signal generation.
5-2
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

<Personal computer setting intended to obtain the adjusting pattern screen outputs>
Personal computers resolution, frequency, and the No. of colors
VT460: Make settings at VESA XGA (1024x768) 70Hz, high color (16 bits) or above.
VT560/660: Make settings at VESA XGA (1024x768) 70Hz, high color (16 bits) or above.
Method of adjusting pattern screen display
With the [ON] button located in the test pattern box, the adjusting pattern screen can be displayed on the
PC screen.
In this case, however, only the test patterns in the [Sub-B/C] tab can be displayed. All other adjusting
patterns are the internally available test patterns.

5-3
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

3. Auto-adjust software installation procedures for Sub-Brightness and Sub-


Contrast
Auto-adjustment of Sub-Brightness/Sub-Contrast and lens calibration software installation procedures are shown
below.
* When the use of this software is intended, it is necessary to change the PC environment.
(Refer to 3-2 PC setting.)

3-1. Installation
1 Start up DGCS1000N.exe that is located beneath service install of the furnished CD-ROM.
2 Click [OK] when the screen shown below is displayed.

5-4
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

3 Click the icon below when the screen shown below is displayed.
* The directory setting of C : DGCS 1000N should not be modified.

4 When the screen shown below is displayed, select the program group and click [Continue].
(If there is no particular designation, immediately press the [Continue] button.)

5-5
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

5 Installation is complete when the screen below of DGCS 1000 System Setup was completed suc-
cessfully is displayed. Click the [OK] button.
Confirm that C : DGCS 1000N has been established in the installed personal computer.

5-6
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

6 Click the [START] button and select [Designate the File Name and Execute (R)]. Enter C:DGCS
1000NDGCS 1000NS.exe /E and press [OK] to start up DGCS1000N.exe.

5-7
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

7 Then the error shown below is indicated. At that time, clickthe [OK] DGCS1000NS.exe /E once to
complete it.

5-8
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

8 Enter the files below C:DGCS 1000NSetup Data as illustrated below. These files are located
beneath service installsetup data file of the furnished CD-ROM.

* SetUp Data File


Model_list.ini
VT460_RGB_SG.dat
VT460_RGB_PCOUT.dat
VT460_COMP.dat
VT460_DVD.dat
VT460_VIDEO.dat
VT560_660_RGB_SG.dat
VT560_660_RGB_PCOUT.dat
VT560_660_COMP.dat
VT560_660_DVD. dat
VT560_660_VIDEO.dat
Window1.exe

At the above-mentioned stage, the installation is over.

5-9
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

3-2. Personal computer setting


Make the following setting for the installed personal computer:

For Win95 / 98 / ME

1 Open [System] of the [Control Panel]. Then, open [Device Manager] of [Systems Property], designate
[Communication Port (COM1)] located beneath [Port (COM&LPT)], and click [Property].

5-10
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

2 Open [Communication Port (COM1) Property] and click [Detailed Setting] of [Port Setting].

3 Make the receive buffer setting of [Detailed Setting of Port] to the maximum level (MAX).

At the above-mentioned stage, the personal computer setting is over.


5-11
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

For Win2000

1 Open [System] of the [Control Panel]. Then, open [Device Manager] located below [Hardware] of
[Systems Property].

5-12
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

2 Open [Communication Port (COM1)] that is located beneath [Port (COM&LPT) of [Device Manager].

3 Then, click [Detail (A)] of [Port Setting] of [Communication Port (COM1) Property].

5-13
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

4 Make the receive buffer setting of [Detailed Setting of COM1] to the maximum level (MAX).

At the above-mentioned stage, the personal computer setting is over.

5-14
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

For WinXP

1 Open [Printer and other Hardware] of the [Control Panel].

2 Open [System] shown below.

5-15
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

3 Open [Device Manager] located beneath [Hardware] of [Systems Property].

4 Then, open [Communication Port (COM1)] that is located beneath [Port (COM&LPT) of [Device Man-
ager].

5-16
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

5 Then, click [Detailed Setting (A)] located below [Port Setting] of [Communication Port (COM1) Prop-
erty].

6 Make the receive buffer setting of [Detailed Setting of COM1] to the maximum level (MAX).

At the above-mentioned stage, the personal computer setting is over.


5-17
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

4. Setting items for data writing


In the VT60 System, FlashUPGrader.exe is used when writing the result of each adjustment (or each DATA
item) in the PJ. At that time, the following setting is required:

1 Establish a folder of C:PW FlashWrite beneath Drive C.


2 A folder specified below is located beneath service installFlashUPGrader of the furnished CD-ROM.
Enter this folder beneath C:PW FlashWrite established as per 1 above.

[FlashUPGrader]
FlashUPGrader.exe
flasher2.hex
VT60.inf
At this stage, all the setting has been completed.

* For DATA rewriting, the power supply must be turned OFF in advance.

5-18
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

5. Repair and adjustment procedures


5-1. Replacement of the MAIN PWB
ADJ Data, VT Data, Uniformity Data, Color Correction Data, and Lamp Data copying
Adjustment of Sub-Brightness/Sub-Contrast
Horizontal adjustments are carried out. (In regard to the method of adjustment, refer to P5-48.)

<ADJ Data, VT Data, Uniformity Data, Color Correction Data, and Lamp Data copying>
With the PJ power supply made to assume the standby mode, select the [Data] tab for the service software.
Check [ADJ], [VT], [Color Correction], [Uniformity], and [LAMP], and click the Make button to produce data.
After the replacement of the board, press the Write button to Write the produced Data.
* Only in the case of writing the lamp data, the power supply has to be turned on (for one minute) after the
completion of data writing. After data writing with FlashUPGrader.exe, turn on the power supply. After the
lapse of one minute after the power supply has been started, the power supply should be turned off again. In
the case of the writing of lamp data only, FlashUPGrader.exe is not started.
The following message is presented at the time of lamp data writing:

<Adjustment of sub-brightness and sub-contrast>


Assume the Power ON state for the PJ power supply.
Select the [Sub-B/C] tab for servicing software.
Make the respective adjustments of RGB / Component (DVD) / Component (HDTV) / Video according to the
descriptions (1), (2), (3), (4), (5), and (6) below. Also, take actions for FlashWrite.
(1) Adjustment of RGB Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast
Select [RGB] in the Adjust Signal Box.
Make adjustments by either method of (a) or (b) below.
(a) Automatic adjustment
As an adjusting signal, enter an input of Window (Center: Black) with the use of an RGB signal generator.
Otherwise, enter an RGB output of the personal computer. (When the PC output is used in the auto-
adjustment mode, the screen is automatically changed over to the Window screen.)
When the [Auto] button is clicked in the Auto ADJ Box, automatic adjustment is started.
After the completion of automatic adjustment, confirm that there is no coloring of the gray scale.
If any coloring is perceived, make fine adjustments of (b) by manual adjustment.
(b) Manual adjustment
If the automatic adjustment is impossible, manual adjustments should be carried out.
As an adjusting signal, enter an input of gray scale with the use of an RGB signal generator. Otherwise,
enter an RGB output of the personal computer and display a gray scale with the use of the [Scale] button
in the Test Pattern Box.
Use a scroll bar to adjust Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast, making sure not to cause black and white
chroma and also coloring in the gray scale.
After the adjustment, click the Save button to store the adjusting data.
* Confirm that a check mark is given to [RGB] in the Adjust Signal Box and the check box of Sub B/C in the
ADJ Check Box when the [Save] button is clicked.
* Normal adjustments cannot be accomplished if the resolution of the adjusting signal and the pattern are
improper.

5-19
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

(2) Adjustment of Sub-Contrast of Component (DVD)


Select [Component (DVD)] in the Adjust Signal Box.
Make adjustments by either method of (a) or (b) below.
(a) Auto adjustment
As an adjusting signal, enter a split color bar (7 colors) with the use of a Component (DVD) signal
generator.
(b) Manual adjustment
If the automatic adjustment is impossible, manual adjustments should be carried out.
As an adjusting signal, enter an input of gray scale with the use of a Component (DVD) signal genera-
tor.
Use a scroll bar to adjust Sub-Contrast of G (Y), making sure not to cause black and white chroma.
After the adjustment, click the Save button to store the adjusting data.
* Confirm that a check mark is given to [DVD] in the Adjust Signal Box and the check box of Sub B/C in the
ADJ Check Box when the [Save] button is clicked.
* Normal adjustments cannot be accomplished if the resolution of the adjusting signal and the pattern are
improper.
(3) Adjustment of Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast of Component (HDTV)
Select [Component (HDTV)] in the Adjust Signal Box.
Make adjustments by either method of (a) or (b) below.
(a) Automatic adjustment
As an adjusting signal, enter a split color bar (7 colors) with the use of a Component (HDTV) signal
generator. When the [Auto] button is clicked in the Auto ADJ Box, automatic adjustment is started.
(b) Manual adjustment
If the automatic adjustment is impossible, manual adjustments should be carried out.
As an adjusting signal, enter an input of gray scale and split color bar with the use of a Component
(HDTV) signal generator.
Use a scroll bar to adjust Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast, making sure not to cause black and white
chroma in the gray scale and that the color bar comes in normal color.
After the adjustment, click the Save button to store the adjusting data.
* Confirm that a check mark is given to [HDTV] in the Adjust Signal Box and the check box of Sub B/C in
the ADJ Check Box when the [Save] button is clicked.
* Normal adjustments cannot be accomplished if the resolution of the adjusting signal and the pattern are
improper.
(4) Adjustment of Video Sub-Contrast
Select [Video] in the Adjust Signal Box.
Make adjustments by either method of (a) or (b) below.
(a) Auto adjustment
As an adjusting signal, enter an input of split color bar (7 colors) with the use of a Video signal generator.
When the [Auto] button is clicked in the Adjust Signal Box, automatic adjustment is started.
(b) Manual adjustment
If the automatic adjustment is impossible, manual adjustments should be carried out.
As an adjusting signal, enter an input of gray scale with the use of a Video signal generator.
Use a scroll bar to adjust Sub-Brightness of G (Y), making sure not to cause white chroma in the gray
scale.
After the adjustment, click the Save button to store the adjusting data.
* Confirm that a check mark is given to [VIDEO] in the Adjust Signal Box and the check box of Sub B/C in
the ADJ Check Box when the [Save] button is clicked.
* Normal adjustments cannot be accomplished if the resolution of the adjusting signal and the pattern are
improper.

5-20
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

(5) Write the result of Sub-Brightness/Sub-Contrast adjustment in the flash memory.


After the completion of adjustments, click the Flash Write button to write the adjusting data.

Then the adjusting data are read out and FlashUPGrader is started for data writing.
* After the completion of data writing, After Cooling is effected for 90 seconds.

5-2. Replacement of the LCD panel


Adjustment of Flicker
Adjustment of Ghost
Adjustment of VLINE
Adjustment of Convergence
* Adjustment of flicker must be done, without fail. However, other adjustments of Ghost, V LINE, and
Convergence may be done, as required, according to the conditions of the set.
* In the case of VT460 adjustments, only the adjustments of [LG Param] are possible for Ghost and those
of [VL PRM] are possible for Vline.

<Adjustment of Flicker>
Select the [Flicker] tab located below the [ADJ] tab of the servicing software.
Click the [GET] button to call up the present setting data.
Adjust Floor / Ceiling, respectively.
(1) Adjustment of Floor
Check [Floor].
Adjustment of Flicker-RED
Click the [TEST-R] button in the Test Pattern Box in order to display the internal horizontal line signal. Make
adjustments with the scroll bar until Flicker in the center comes to minimum.
Adjustment of Flicker-GREEN
Click the [TEST-G] button in the Test Pattern Box in order to display the internal horizontal line signal. Make
adjustments with the scroll bar until Flicker in the center comes to minimum.
Adjustment of Flicker-BLUE
Click the [TEST-B] button in the Test Pattern Box in order to display the internal horizontal line signal. Make
adjustments with the scroll bar until Flicker in the center comes to minimum.
(2) Adjustment of Ceiling
Check [Ceiling].
Adjustment of Flicker-RED
Click the [TEST-R] button in the Test Pattern Box in order to display the internal horizontal line signal. Make
adjustments with the scroll bar until Flicker in the center comes to minimum.
Adjustment of Flicker-GREEN
Click the [TEST-G] button in the Test Pattern Box in order to display the internal horizontal line signal. Make
adjustments with the scroll bar until Flicker in the center comes to minimum.
Adjustment of Flicker-BLUE
Click the [TEST-B] button in the Test Pattern Box in order to display the internal horizontal line signal. Make
adjustments with the scroll bar until Flicker in the center comes to minimum.
When adjustments have been finished for both (1) and (2) above, click the Save button in the Data
Box.
* After the completion of the above adjustment, confirm that a check mark is given to the check box of Flicker
in the ADJcheck Box and in the ADJcheck Box.
* Press [Reset] if it is necessary to recover the original setting during adjustment.
* Click the [CLS] button when deleting the Test Pattern.

5-21
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

<Adjustment of Ghost>
This adjustment is not always required. If Ghost seems to be conspicuous, make adjustments as shown below.
* This adjustment should be carried out in the state of no signal.
(No test pattern output is generated unless the state of no signal is assumed.)
Select the [Ghost] tab of the servicing software.
Click the [GET] button to call up the present setting data.
Click [Ghost] to display the test pattern for ghost adjustment.
Press [Clear] when deleting the test pattern.
Adjust [Enable] and [F-Tune] of the color where Ghost is generated. Get to the setting where a normal
picture is displayed and Ghost disappears. If there is no setting that eliminates Ghost, adjust the setting of
[Ghost_Panel] to change the correction level until Ghost disappears.
(If Ghost looks black, move the bar to the right. If it is white, move the bar to the left.)
When Ghost disappears, click the Save button.
* After the completion of adjustments, confirm that a check mark is given to the check box of Flicker in the
ADJ Check Box.
* Press the [Reset] button when it is necessary to recover the original setting in the middle of adjustments.
* Click the [CLS] button to delete the test pattern.
<Adjustment of VLINE>
This adjustment is not always required. If V Line seems to be conspicuous, make adjustments as shown below.
Select the [Vline] tab of the servicing software.
Click the [GET] button to call up the present setting data.
Click [V-Scale] to display the test pattern for vertical line adjustment.
Press [Clear] when deleting the test pattern.
Adjust the settings of [PCH-G1] and [PCH-G2] to delete the vertical line.
If the vertical line does not disappear, recover the original settings of [PCH-G1] and [PCH-G2], and modify
the setting value of [VL-PRM] to change the correction level.
(If the vertical line looks black, move the bar to the right by one or two steps. If it is white, move the bar to the
left by one or two steps.)
When a vertical line disappears, click the Save button.
* After the completion of adjustments, confirm that a check mark is given to the check box of Flicker in the
ADJ Check Box.
* Press the [Reset] button when it is necessary to recover the original setting in the middle of adjustments.
* Click the [CLS] button to delete the test pattern.
<Adjustment of Convergence >
This adjustment is not always required. If Convergence seems to be displaced, make adjustments as shown below.
Select the [Conver] tab of the servicing software.
Click the [GET] button to call up the present setting data.
Click [Cross] to display the test pattern (crosshatch).
Press [Clear] when deleting the test pattern.
Move the position of the adjusting color.
(This moving action should be done based on green. Movement is possible only for red and blue. According
to the default value, movement of 1 dot is possible for both vertical and horizontal.)
If the vertical line does not disappear, recover the original settings of [SRV_low] and [SRV_high], and modify
the setting value of [Vline_Panel] to change the correction level.
Move the position of the adjusting color.
After the completion of adjustments, click the Save button.
* After the completion of adjustments, confirm that a check mark is given to the check box of Flicker in the
ADJ Check Box.
* Press the [Reset] button when it is necessary to recover the original setting in the middle of adjustments.
* Click the [CLS] button to delete the test pattern.

After the completion of adjustments, click the Flash Write button to write the adjusting data.
Then, the adjusting data are read out and FlashUPGrader is started for data writing.
* After the completion of data writing, After Cooling is effected for 90 seconds.

5-22
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
6.Various functional descriptions
6-1. Setting

<Model Check>
When the [Model Check] button is clicked, [Model Name] and [Resolution] are displayed in the lower
status bar area.
Model Name Resolution
VT460: VT460 800*600
VT560: VT660 1024*768
VT660: VT660 1024*768
* When the VT560 is connected, the model name is written as VT660. However, there is no
problem.
Since the board name is the same, the same model name is used.

<Input Select>
Used for input changeover.

<Test Pattern>
Used for the display of various built-in Test Patterns.
[Flicker] : Horizontal line signal for Flicker adjustment
[H-Scale] : 16-gradation horizontal gray scale
[V-Scale] : 16-gradation vertical gray scale
[Ghost] : Test pattern for Ghost adjustment
[Cross] : Crosshatch
[Color] : Color bar

5-23
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

[100% Raster] : All-white Raster


[50% Raster] : 50% brightness Raster
[25% Raster] : 25% brightness Raster
[0% Raster] : All-black Raster
[CLS] : Test Pattern clear
[R]/[G]/[B] : The Test Pattern comes in the color that is indicated by a check mark.

<COM>
Used for the selection of PC Com Port and Baud Rate.
Communication will fail to start unless the baud rate coincides with the PJ setting.
The default setting value of the PJ is 19200 bps.

5-24
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

6-2. DATA

<Read Data>
A check mark is attached to the data that are going to be read out in the Data-Make Box.
The data selected here are made when the Make (File) button is clicked.

<Data Make>
Used to make the data specified with the Read Data Box.

< Data Write>


Used to write the file established as per <Data Make>.
Click the Write (File->PJ) button in the Data Write Box and select the Hex File data to be written in.
Then, the Flash Data Upgrade tool (FlashUpgrade.exe) is started and the selected Hex File data are
written in the flash ROM of the PJ.

* Only for LAMP Data Writing, it is necessary to turn ON the power supply once after the completion of
Data writing.
Turn ON the power supply after the completion of data writing with FlashUPGrader.exe.
After the lapse of one minute after starting up the power supply, turn OFF the power supply again.
* According to the status of error, Data Saving may be impossible to carry out.
The Default Data are written in advance in the MAIN PWB.
* Various user set values are not retained. These values are restored to the setting values defined at the
time of shipment from the factory.
* The hex files, which can be written with this tool, are only the ones read with <Data Make>.

5-25
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

6-3. ADJ
<ADJcheck>
This provides the respective adjusting tabs. A check mark is given only to the item where the data have
been saved.
When an action of [Flash Write] is taken, only the items with the check marks are updated.
* The check mark disappears when the RESET button is pressed.

<Flash Write>
This tool is used to write adjusted data in the flash memory.
Only the items that are checked in the ADJ Heck Box can be updated.

6-3-1. Sub-B/C

<TEST>
The test patterns of Window (black window, white background) and Scale (16-gradation gray scale) are
output to the personal computer.
Used for the automatic adjustment of Sub B/C with the use of a personal computer.

<DATA>
Save : Data are saved after the completion of adjustments.
Reset : Data are restored to those which have been available at the time of power supply startup.
* When each [Adjust Signal] button is clicked after the data have been saved, the initial data (the
data at the time of power supply turned ON initially) are updated.

<Adjust Signal>
The signal for adjustment is specified.

5-26
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

<Manual ADJ>
Used for manual adjustment of Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast.
The data are respectively arranged for the four types of signals, RGB / Component (DVD) / Component
(HDTV) / Video. When the signal data selected in the Auto ADJ Box are acquired, respective displays of
R(Cr) / G(Y) / B(Cb) are presented beside the scroll bar on the screen.
The data acquired at first (at the time of ADJ software start) are stored as initial values and indicated on
the left side of the arrow. The present values are displayed on the right side of the arrow.
However, when Data Write is performed with [Data], the data written at that time are regarded as the initial
values.

<Auto ADJ>
AUTO : Used for automatic adjustments.
During the SG check, the automatic adjustment by external signals is carried out. During the
PC-OUT check, the automatic adjustment with the use of a PC output is carried out.
* PC-OUT is available only for RGB signal adjustments.
Level Read / Position:
Used when changing the level readout position with the [AUTO] button during the automatic adjustment.
In the phase of ADJ software start, setting has been made according to the specified pattern. Therefore,
no particular changes are needed. If any modification is needed, read through 6-4. Auto-adjust position
change.
* The data adjusted with a scroll bar are temporary. Without any measures taken, the data are not
retained in the PJ.
Even when the data are saved in a file by [SAVE], this action corresponds to a fact that the data are just
saved in a file and not written in the flash ROM. Therefore, the data are not retained in the PJ.
After the file has been saved, execute [FlashWrite] to select the saved file and write it in the flash ROM.
* Automatic adjustments are carried out based on a definite spot on the screen. Therefore, if the pattern,
resolution, etc., are not suitable, these adjustments are impossible to carry out.

5-27
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

6-3-2. Flicker

<TEST>
This tool is used for the display of various built-in test patterns for flicker adjustment.
[TEST-R] : The horizontal line signal of R is displayed.
[TEST-G] : The horizontal line signal of G is displayed.
[TEST-B] : The horizontal line signal of B is displayed.
[CLS] : Test patterns are cleared.

<Data>
Get : The present set data are called up.
Save : The DATA after adjustment are saved.
Reset : Data are restored to those which have been available at the time of power supply startup.
* When the [Get] button is clicked after the data have been saved, the initial data (data at the
time of power supply startup) are updated.

<Floor / Ceiling>
The data are arranged for Floor and Ceiling, respectively.
The present PJ data are acquired and displayed on the screen.
The data acquired at first (at the time of ADJ software start) are stored as initial values and indicated on
the left side of the arrow. The present values are displayed on the right side of the arrow.
However, when Data Write is performed with [Data Write], the data written at that time are regarded as the
initial values.

5-28
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

Select the method of projection for which the adjustment of Floor / Ceiling is made.
The scroll bar on the selected side becomes available.
Display the test pattern and make adjustments of R / G / B with a scroll bar until each flicker in the center
comes to be minimum.
* The data adjusted with a scroll bar are temporary. Without any measures taken, the data are not
retained in the PJ.

5-29
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

6-3-3. Ghost

<TEST>
Ghost : Used for Ghost adjustment.

<DATA>
Get : Used to call up the present set data.
Save : Used for data storage after adjustments.
Reset : Used to recover data at the time of power turned ON.
* When the [Get] button is clicked after the data have been saved, the initial data (data at the
time of power supply startup) are updated.

<Enable and Panel Correction>


This function is used for the Ghost Enable adjustment.
The present PJ data are acquired and displayed on the screen.
The data acquired at first (at the time of ADJ software start) are stored as initial values and indicated on
the left side of the arrow. The present values are displayed on the right side of the arrow.
However, when ADJ Data Write is performed with [Data], the data written at that time are regarded as the
initial values.
The data come in 4 types for each color. During adjustment, however, there is a simultaneous increment
or decrement in the 4 types of data.
Adjusting range: Ghost: 03h
Ghost panel: 00h - 20h
* In the VT460, the adjustment of Enable is not carried out.

5-30
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

6-3-4. Vline

<TEST>
V-Scale: Used for Vline adjustment.

<DATA>
Get : Used to call up the present set data.
Save : Used for data storage after adjustments.
Reset : Used to recover data at the time of power turned ON.
* When the [Get] button is clicked after the data have been saved, the initial data (data at the
time of power supply startup) are updated.

<PCH and VL Parm2>


This function is used for the V Line (vertical line) adjustment.
The present PJ data are acquired and displayed on the screen.
The data acquired at first (at the time of ADJ software start) are stored as initial values and indicated on
the left side of the arrow. The present values are displayed on the right side of the arrow.
Display the test pattern and make adjustments with a scroll bar until the vertical line comes to be mini-
mum.
Adjusting range: PCH: 00h - FFh
Vline Panel: 02h
* In the VT460, the adjustment of PCH is not carried out.

5-31
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

6-3-5. Conver

<TEST>
Cross: Used to generate a cross hatch pattern output.

<DATA>
Get : Used to call up the present set data.
Save : Used for data storage after adjustments.
Reset : Used to recover data at the time of power turned ON.
* When the [Get] button is clicked after the data have been saved, the initial data (data at the
time of power supply startup) are updated.

<CONVER>
The present PJ data are acquired and displayed on the screen.
The data acquired at first (at the time of ADJ software start) are stored as initial values and indicated on
the left side of the arrow. The present values are displayed on the right side of the arrow.
Display the test pattern and make adjustments of the deviation in the color being adjusted.
The moving range of the scroll bar is 1 dot.

5-32
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

6-3-6. Lamp

<DATA>
Get : The present set data are called up.
Save : The data after adjustment are saved.
Reset : Data are restored to those which have been available at the time of power supply startup.
* When the [Get] button is clicked after the data have been saved, the initial data (data at the
time of power supply startup) are updated.

<Change time (Lamp Usage Time)>


Used to change the lamp usage time.
According to the lamp usage time, the variable range of indication in percentage is defined.
Using a scroll bar, set up an adequate time or percentage.
Setting range : 0 hours 3000 hours
0% - 100%

<Change time (Filter Usage Time)>


Used to change the filter usage time.
Setting range : Scroll bar: 0 Hours 3200 Hours
Editor input: 0 Hours 596523 Hours

<Change time (Panel Usage Time)>


Used to change the panel usage time.
Setting range : Scroll bar: 0 Hours 3200 Hours
Editor input: 0 Hours 596523 Hours

5-33
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

<Change time (Projector Usage Time)>


Used to change the projector usage time.
Setting range : Scroll bar: 0 Hours 3200 Hours
Editor input: 0 Hours 596523 Hours

* To modify the usage time, assume the state of OFF (Standby) for the PJ power supply, without fail.
After the completion of adjustments, press the [SET] button. After the lapse of more than one minute
after the power supply has been started, turn off the power supply again. If the power supply is turned
off without waiting for the lapse of more than one minute, the adjusting data are not reflected.
* When data rewriting is carried out with Read/Write of Lamp Data in [Data] at the time of MAIN PWB
replacement, it is unnecessary to change the usage time of the lamp, the filter, the panel, or the projec-
tor because this usage time has also been rewritten to the previous usage time.

5-34
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

6-4. Auto-adjust position change

When automatic adjustment is intended with [Sub-B/C] by means of the [Auto] button, the signal level is
read out in the fixed position that has been defined on the screen.
Since this read-out position can differ according to the adjusting mode and color, all patterns, resolution,
and other factors are specified and set in the relevant positions in advance. Therefore, no particular
modification is required in general operation.
Automatic adjustment is impossible, however, where a similar pattern is allocated in a slightly different
position.
In such a case, setting can be carried out according to the descriptions below.
Adjustments become impossible if a wrong position is set up.

<Read>
This function is used to look for a position being modified.
Enter a position input in the [H], [V] editor.
The numeral to be entered is decimal. The guidelines are the number of dots for [H] and the number of
lines for [V] (half in case of interlace).
When the [Read] button is clicked, the signal level of the specified position is displayed for R/G/B, respec-
tively.
This value is displayed within the range of 0 (black) - 255 (white).
Based on this figure, confirm where the specified position is located on the screen and look for the
position to be used for adjustment.

5-35
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

<Position>

This function is used to set up the position to be used for automatic adjustment.
When the [Position] button is clicked, the position setting screen is open.
Each editor is displayed with the present set value.
At the time of ADJ software starting, the position is set up according to the specified pattern.
Enter the changing position input, confirmed by <Read>, in the editor.
Fix the setting with the [SET] button.
Finish the position setting screen with the [Exit] button.

Each item setting:


RGB_SG White H/V : 100% white when a signal generator is used (White position of the Window
screen)
RGB_SG Black H/V : 0% black when a signal generator is used (Black position of the Window
screen)
RGB_PCOUT White H/V : 100% white when a PC output is used (White position of the Window screen)
RGB_PCOUT Black H/V : 0% black when a PC output is used (Black position of the Window screen)
Component White Y H/V : 100% white (White position below the center of the split color bar)
Component White Cb H/V : 75% blue (Blue bar position of the split color bar)
Component Red Cr H/V : 75% red (Red bar position of the split color bar)
Component Black H/V : 0% black (Black position at bottom right of the split color bar)
Component Target H/V : 75% white (White bar position of the split color bar)
For Video and DVD, the same as for Component.

5-36
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

7. Error messages
7-1. Errors anticipated when this service ADJ software is used.
ACK Error !, Wrong ACK Length !
This is a communication error in conjunction with the PJ.
Check the connections and confirm whether the main power supply of the PJ is turned ON.

ACK Error (Comm Close Error) !


This is a failure in opening the serial port.
Confirm if there is any application that occupies the serial port.

Wrong ACK Length (Comm Close Error) !


This is a failure in closing the serial port.
Confirm if there is any application that occupies the serial port.

Model Error
This is a set discrimination error for the PJ. Confirm that the connected set belongs to any one of the
VT460/560/660.

5-37
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

7-2. Errors appearing during the automatic adjustment of Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast.

Errors appearing when no auto-ADJ software is installed.

Install the software according to 3. Auto-adjust software installation procedures for Sub-
Brightness and Sub-Contrast.

Errors appearing when the set data are insufficient.

Add the setup data according to 3. Auto-adjust software installation procedures for Sub-
Brightness and Sub-Contrast.

5-38
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

Errors appearing when the input signals and position setting are wrong.

Check the input signals and position setting, referring to 5. Repair and adjustment proce-
dures and 6-4. Auto-adjust position change.
(No checking is required if position setting is not carried out.)

When the Auto-Adjust Software is closed on the way:


If the error shown above appears, the Auto-Adjust Software is closed on the way. In such a case, make the
treatments shown below and close the Auto-Adjust Software. Since then, start the auto-adjustments again.
* Do not click any button other than the designated button.

ADJ screen: Press the [Return (R)] button.

5-39
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

Setting screen: Press the [Return (R)] button.

5-40
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

Main screen: Press the [End (E)] button and then the [OK] button to close the software.

* A phenomenon shown below may occur during the RGB adjustment in the PC-OUT mode. In such a case,
press the [ENTER] button of the PC to withdraw from the error state. Execute the above-mentioned Auto-
Adjust Software closed on the way and then close the Auto-Adjust Software. Since then, make adjust-
ments again.
This phenomenon occurs if there is any error in the Auto-Adjust Software in the middle of adjustment for a
certain reason.
If the screen shown below does not disappear even though the ENTER button is pressed, turn off the power
supply of the PJ once and try to make adjustments again.

A white box appears at bottom right or in the center right against the black background of the PJ screen
(RGB1), as illustrated.
5-41
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

Serviceman Mode

1. Modifications from former models ....................................................5-43


2. List of functions.................................................................................. 5-43
3. Modal changeover ...............................................................................5-43
3.1. Expert mode .................................................................................................... 5-43
3.2. Serviceman mode ............................................................................................ 5-43
3.3. How to withdraw from the mode .................................................................... 5-43
3.4. Contents of display .......................................................................................... 5-44

4. Additional functions ........................................................................... 5-44


4.1. Background for focus adjustment (Serviceman mode only) ....................... 5-44
4.2. Information (Serviceman mode only) ............................................................. 5-44
4.3. Default (Serviceman mode only) ................................................................... 5-44
4.4. Expert Menu ...................................................................................................... 5-45
4.4.1. Test Pattern ...................................................................................................................... 5-45
4.4.2. Sync Protection .............................................................................................................. 5-45
4.4.3. VD Delay .......................................................................................................................... 5-45
4.4.4. VS Begin ........................................................................................................................... 5-45
4.4.5. Clamp Timing ................................................................................................................... 5-45
4.4.6. Communication Speed .................................................................................................... 5-46
4.4.7. Remote Sensor ............................................................................................................... 5-46
4.4.8. Filter clean Message....................................................................................................... 5-46
4.5 Serviceman Menu ............................................................................................ 5-47
4.5.1. Check Start ...................................................................................................................... 5-47
4.5.2. Change Offset .................................................................................................................. 5-47
4.5.3. Offset ................................................................................................................................ 5-47
4.5.4. Color Uniformity .............................................................................................................. 5-47

5-42
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

1. Modifications from former models


An expert mode has been newly provided. With this mode, it is possible to make effective the adjusting func-
tions that can be offered to the providers.

2. List of functions
Functions Expert Service
Test Parrern < <
Sync Protection < <
VD Delay < <
VS Begin < <
Clamp Timing < <
Communication Speed < <
Remote Sensor < <
Filter Clearn Message < <
Auto keystone horizontal adjustment X <
Color Uniformity X <
Clear Panel Usage X <
Pattern display for focus adjustment X <
3. Modal changeover
3.1. Expert mode
While the HELP key is pressed to display the Information screen, press the keys shown below in this se-
quence.
TOP -> LEFT -> HELP
Press the MENU key to display the menu and confirm that [Expert] is displayed below the menu.

3.2. Serviceman mode


In the state of Power ON, press the HELP key more than three times.
When the ENTER and MENU keys are pressed in this order, a menu of [Pass Cord] is displayed.
Press the select keys in the order specified below.
BOTTOM -> TOP -> RIGHT -> TOP -> RNTER
Press the MENU key to display the menu and confirm that [Service] is displayed below the menu.

3.3. How to withdraw from the mode


In the state that no menu is displayed, press the [CANCEL] key to recover the original status.
Recover the standby state by pressing the [POWER] key. When this action is taken, the original status can
also be recovered at the time of next starting.

5-43
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

3.4. Contents of display


When the serviceman mode or the expert mode is assumed, the menu is added with the functions specified
below.
Mode display
The mode is displayed beside the section where the terminal name is displayed beneath the menu.
Addition of the adjusting functions to the menu top
The adjusting functions usually not displayed come to be displayed. Then, adjustments become possible.
In the expert mode, an expert menu can be selected.
In the serviceman mode, an expert menu or a serviceman menu can be selected. In addition, [Pattern] is
added to the background options and [Clear Panel Usage] is added to the initialize menu.
Modification of processing for existing functions
In the serviceman mode, the items to be initialized are increased for the Factory Default.

4. Additional functions
4.1. Background for focus adjustment (Serviceman mode only)
An option of Pattern is added to Setup/Background. When it is selected, a specific adjusting pattern is dis-
played in the no-signal state. While this function is selected, the area of the present setting name becomes
vacant in the Background that is displayed in the menu.
It must be noted that this setting value is not restored to its former status even after withdrawing from the
serviceman mode.

4.2. Information (Serviceman mode only)


Display of a version number is added to Page 2.

BIOS Version This area is needed for updating. It is not very frequently modified.
Firmware Version The main area of firmware
Data Version Signal table, etc.
GUI Version Menu design, multi-language, etc.

4.3. Default (Serviceman mode only)


Clear Panel Usage
This is an initializing function for the panel usage time. When the [Enter] key is pressed, a confirmation mes-
sage is displayed.
When [Yes] is selected, the panel usage time is set at 0.P.4

5-44
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

4.4. Expert Menu


4.4.1. Test Pattern
This function is used for the pattern setting and the display of the test pattern.

4.4.2 . Sync Protection


It is possible to make adjustments of Upper and Lower.
IC AD9883A, intended for the A/D conversion of RGB signals, has a function to generate the sampling
clock for A/D conversion from HSYNC that is entered in the A/D.
Actually, the HSYNC signal is divided at the dividing ratio that has been preset, so that the resultant
frequency can be compared with the frequency that is gained from VCO oscillation. The differential
signal is fed back to the VCO so that the VCO frequency can be kept to be constant and synchronized
with the HSYNC signal. (In short, a PLL effect is given to the HSYNC signal.)
At that time, however, the operation of feedback to the VCO may be wrongly performed and the
oscillation frequency of the VCO may deviate from the intended frequency if the pulse intervals of
HSYNC are wrongly changed due to the effect of equivalent pulses and incoming pulses of the HSYNC
signal.
This function has been provided to avoid such a difficulty. With this function, a period is set up to
suspend feedback operation to the VCO.
In regard to the adjusting range, the front side is defined as the UPPER side and the rear side as the
LOWER side, based on the VSYNC.
Practically, adjustments are made in the setting position where no malfunction occurs even though the
screen should give rise to any difficulty such as upper screen bend or the like.

4.4.3. VD Delay
Off, Mode1, Mode2, Mode3, Auto
This function enables that the selected mode becomes effective when closing the menu displaying the
options.
With the HSYNC input entered in the PW164B, the timing for VSYNC is adjusted.
In the PW164B, the position of VSYNC to HSYNC may affect the signal discrimination and display
timing. Therefore, this function is used to make adjustments to avoid such difficulties. The expected
effect of this function is the refusal of the following:
Small V vibration
Screen split into two in V direction
Half screen display only in V direction
Repetition of screen display and no-screen display
According to the signal conditions and others, improvements may be impossible to carry out.
Adjustments should be made in a position where no malfunction may occur.

4.4.4. VS Bbegin
In the PW164B, the line position and other factors to start up the display are defined based on the
timing at which the entered H sync input is transferred to the V sync mode.
The VS Begin is the circuit that determines the threshold value of the above-mentioned timing at which
H sync is switched over to V sync.
If the changeover timing from H sync to V sync seems to affect the signal display, such a problem can
be solved by adjusting the VS Begin circuit.
The phenomena, for which the effect of adjustment can be expected, are shown below.
The screen sways in the V direction.
The line is reversed by an interlace signal.
For reasons of some signal conditions or others, the above-mentioned improvements may fail to be
accomplished.
To obtain a better result, adjustments should be carried out where no deficiencies may arise.

5-45
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

4.4.5. Clamp Timing


Used to adjust clamp timing for the HSYNC signal.
If the clamp timing does not match the video start timing for HSYNC of the input signal or the sync end
timing for VSYNC, clamping may be carried out even in the middle of video operation. In such a case,
a single black belt may appear in vertical direction or a brightness error may occur because clamping
is performed in the sync phase. In the case of a Component signal, a color error or the like may arise.
Adjustments should be made in a position where no malfunction occurs.

4.4.6. Communication Speed


Used to make the setting of communication speed (Baud rate).

Setting Function
4800 Baud rate set at 4800 bps.
9600 Baud rate set at 9600 bps.
19200 Baud rate set at 19200 bps.

4.4.7. Remote Sensor


Setting is made to determine whether the receiver of the remote control is used or not used.
This function enables that the selected mode becomes effective when closing the menu displaying the
options.

Setting Function
Front/Rear Both of the light receiving blocks in the front and rear of the set are used.
Front Only the light receiving block in the front of the set is used.
Rear Only the light receiving block in the rear of the set is used.

4.4.8. Filter Clean Message


This function is used to set up display or no display of the alarm messages for filter cleaning. When
this function is turned ON, an alarm message is displayed for about one minute (more accurately,
during the period of Power OFF prevention) if the Power switch is turned on after attaining 100 hours
of filter usage time.
When this function is turned ON, no alarm message is displayed.
The initial value is ON after Factory Default.

5-46
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

4.5. Serviceman Menu


4.5.1. Check Start
This function is used to measure the value of auto-trapezoidal compensation in horizontal state. First
of all, the horizontal state should be assumed.
The present value is checked and displayed in about 2 seconds. When the ENTER key is pressed,
this measurement is started and an hourglass is displayed on the screen.
When the measurement is over, a menu is displayed and the counted value is displayed in the item of
Change Offset.

4.5.2. Change Offset


The measured value in horizontal state is set up in the main unit. While 0 is displayed, measurement
is not started yet.
If any value other than 0 is displayed, the displayed value can be set up in the main unit when the
ENTER key is pressed. After the completion of operation, a menu is displayed and Value 0 is dis-
played.
The value set up in the main unit is displayed in the item of Offset.

4.5.3. Offset
The value in horizontal state, presently used in the main unit, is displayed.
The numerals can be changed by pressing the right and left keys. Shortly after this change, the result
can be stored in the main unit.

After the completion of measurements for auto-trapezoidal compensation, cancel Auto Keystone of
Image in the menu and then turn it ON again. At the time of changing from OFF to ON, the keystone
data are updated at the preset value.
The above-mentioned menu operation is not always required. Though a new setting value is used
internally, no additional compensation is carried out until a change is sensed in the gradient from the
gradient sensor. Therefore, so long as video images are observed, it seems as if no reflection had
been made in regard to the adjusting value.
In cases other than the above-mentioned menu operation, shaking the main unit or making a restart
operation by turning off the power source can be reflected on the state of projection.
* When the actions of 4.5.2 or 4.5.3 are taken, the execution of Factory Default (All data) is needed.
(If Factory Default is not executed, no data are written in the flash memory. In this case, this Factory
Default should be executed in the serviceman mode.)

4.5.4. Color Uniformity


Used for ON/OFF setting for color unevenness compensation.
In case of the replacement of the OPT base for example, the condition of color unevenness may be
made worse if the data before replacement are used as the data for color unevenness compensation.
Accordingly, the function of color unevenness compensation should have been turned off in this case.

5-47
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

1. Adjustment of the optical axis (Shadow control)


1-1. Tools to be used
The tools to be used for this adjustment shall be as specified below.
<<Tools>>
FL, RL2, M1 fixing ball driver: Opposite side 2.0mm (Part No.: 92339583)
M1 adjusting minus screwdriver: Blade width 5.0mm

5-48
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

1-2. Shadow control flow

Start of adjustment

Not neutral
Make neutral checks. Adjust it to the neutral.

In neutral

Make upper and lower shadow G, R shadows present


adjustments for G and R (1-6-1).
First trial Second and thereafter

Check the upper and lower shadows for B.


Shadow present No shadow

Adjust the upper and lower shadows


for B (1-6-2). Shadow of B only present

Check the upper and lower shadows


for R, G, and B.
Shadow present
No shadow; No shadow;
First trial Second trial and thereafter

Check the right and left shadows for G.


Shadow present No shadow

Adjust the right and left shadows


for G (1-6-3). Shadow of G present
First trial Second and thereafter

Check the right and left shadows for R.


Shadow present No shadow

Adjust the right and left shadows


for R (1-6-4). Shadow of R present,
no shadows of G
First trial Second and thereafter

Check the right and left shadows for B.


Shadow present No shadow

Adjust the right and left shadows


for B (1-6-5). Sadow of B only
present

Check the right and left shadows


for R, G, and B. Shadow present
No shadow

Check the upper and lower shadows


for R, G, and B. Shadow present
No shadow

End of adjustment

5-49
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

1-3 . Handling of margin for shadow control


Shadow control shall be carried out so that the vertical and horizontal margins can be uniformly distributed.
If control is carried out at the LCD panel, however, adjustments should be performed till parts of the vertical
and horizontal shadow can be seen because the margins cannot be observed directly. By observing how
much the vertical and horizontal shadow is available in this manner, control can be stopped in the setting
where the margins can be distributed uniformly.

1-4. Method of neutral check


(1) FL
Vertical : The upper end plane of the mounting metal fitting (FL) meets that of the holder (FL).
Horizontal : The hook part of the mounting metal fitting (FL) settles in the center of the hemisphere
part directed in the FL direction of Cover A.

(2) RL2
Horizontal : The mounting metal fitting (RL2) settles uniformly in the open part of Cover A.

(3) M1
Rotation : The adjusting section (key-shaped part) of the holder (M1) settles in the center of the
separator base.

1.5 Operation of each adjusting block

1
1-5-1. Vertical adjustment of FL

2
Sufficiently loosen the vertical fixing screws of FL (in 2 positions).

3
Hold the hook part of the holder (FL) by hand and move it vertically.
Fix the vertical fixing screws of FL (in 2 positions).
The fixing torque shall be 3.5 0.5kgfcm.

1
1-5-2. Horizontal adjustment of FL

2
Loosen the horizontal fixing screws of FL by one turn (in 2 positions).

3
Move the FL by hand to the right and left.
Fix the horizontal fixing screws of FL (in 2 positions).
The fixing torque shall be 3.5 0.5kgfcm.

1
1-5-3. Vertical adjustment of RL2

2
Sufficiently loosen the vertical fixing screw of RL2 (in 1 position).

3
Hold the hook part of the holder (RL2) by hand and move the RL2 vertically.
Fix the vertical fixing screw of RL2 (in 1 position).
The fixing torque shall be 3.5 0.5kgfcm.

1
1-5-4. Horizontal adjustment of RL2

2
Loosen the horizontal fixing screw of RL2 by one turn (in 1 position).

3
Hold the RL2 by hand and move it to the right and left.
Fix the horizontal fixing screw of RL2 (in 1 position).
The fixing torque shall be 3.5 0.5kgfcm.

5-50
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

1
1-5-5. M1 adjustment

2
Loosen the rotation fixing screw of M1 (in 1 position) by half a turn.

3
Use a minus screwdriver and turn the M1 to move it.
Fix the rotation fixing screw of M1 (in 1 position).
The fixing torque shall be 3.5 0.5kgfcm.

Adjustment point
Mirror 1 (optical axis)

Field lens
(optixal axis)
Relay lens 2
(optical axis)

Polarizer G (contrast)

5-51
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

1-6. Shadow control for each color


1-6-1. Vertical shadow control for G and R
Move the FL vertically until vertical shadow is eliminated.
However in this case, the shadow of B (a part seen in yellow in a projector screen) shall be excluded.

1-6-2. Vertical shadow control for B


Move the RL2 vertically until vertical shadow of B is eliminated.
(Control should be carried out until a vertical part seen in yellow in a projector screen is eliminated.)

1-6-3. Horizontal shadow control for G


Move the FL horizontally until horizontal shadow is eliminated.
However in this case, the shadow of R (a part seen in cyan in a projector screen) and the shadow of B (a part
seen in yellow in the projector screen) shall be excluded.

1-6-4. Horizontal shadow control for R


Turn the M1 until horizontal shadow of R is eliminated.
(Control should be carried out until a horizontal part seen in cyan in a projector screen is eliminated.)

1-6-5. Horizontal shadow control for B


Move the RL2 horizontally until horizontal shadow of B is eliminated.
(Control should be carried out until a horizontal part seen in yellow in a projector screen is eliminated.)

Adjustment of the optical axis

Field lens Mirror 1


Horizontal fixing
screw
Vertical fixing screws
(bottom side)

Adjustment point
Hook part of the (bottom side)
holder
(under plate)

Relay lens 2 Horizontal fixing


screw

Hook part of the


Horizontal fixing screws
holder
(bottom side)

Vertical fixing
screw

5-52
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

2. Adjustment of the polarizing plate


2-1. Tools to be used
The tools to be used for this adjustment shall be as specified below.
<<Tools>>
Polarizing plate fixing ball driver: Opposite side 2.0mm (Part No.: 92339583)

2-2. Adjustments
1
2
Adjustments described above shall be carried out for G only.

3
Use a ball driver (opposite side: 2.0mm) and loosen the polarizing plate fixing screw (in 1 position).

4
Turn the polarizing plate to move. (Manually)

5
Stop it where the contrast attains maximum.
Fix the polarizing plate fixing screw (in 1 position).
The fixing torque shall be 3.5 0.5kgfcm.

Adjustment polarizing plate (contrast)

Polarizer G

Connect LCD using a OPTICAL ADJ KIT (VT60)


(Part No. 9N999044)
Input a black signal
Fix on the point which becomes the darkest

Fixing screw

5-53
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

Jig PWB / Cable


OPTICAL ADJ KIT (VT60) (Part No.; 9N999044) (Ball drtiver in cluded)

Ball driver 3 pcs. used for FFC 24P VT460 3 pcs. used for FFC 30P VT560/VT660

CN2P (POT2) 600W

CN3P (POF1) 200W

CN3P (POSP) 300W

CN2P (POBM) 400W

CN3P (POF3) 400W

CN3P (POF23) 400W

CN5P (POLC) 400W

CN15P (POPW) 400W

Extension PWB for FAN Extension PWB for


POWER SUPPLY
Extension PWB for
THERMISTOR/BIMETAL

Extension PWB for


PANEL (30P for
VT560/VT660)

Not required (spare)

Extension PWB for BALLAST Extension PWB for PANEL (24P for VT460)

5-54
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

Jig connection diagram

Short-circuit the section between TP4003 and TP4002.

Please refer to the connection diagram (P.12-1) for the respective connectors that are connected to the
MAIN PWB ASSY.

5-55
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS

Cleaning of Lens and Mirror


1. Cleaning of the projector lens
* Cleaner liquid
Absolute alcohol should be used.
If water drops seem to remain as a result of unfavorable drying, replace the absolute alcohol with new one.
* Method of cleaning
Use a piece of cloth or cleaning paper available on the market and let it be soaked with the cleaner liquid.
Draw a circle from the center of the lens toward the outer periphery. Wipe off the contaminants and dust by
nipping them at the edge part of the lens.
In this case, make sure not to wipe the lens surface too strong.

Cleaning cloth
(92339585)

Lens

2. Cleaning of the mirror


Take away the contaminants by the use of absolute alcohol. Then wipe the area with dry cloth.
The mirror has been vapor-treated. Never grip it strongly. Do not touch it with empty hands.
(To keep the mirror surface free from fingerprints, etc.)

3. LCD panel/lens
Take away the contaminants by the use of absolute alcohol. Then wipe the area with dry cloth.
The influence of contaminants to the screen is extremely intensified when contaminants are attached to both
sides of the LCD panel, the LCD side of the relay lens 1, and the integrator (lamp side). Utmost care must be
taken to these surfaces.

5-56
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
1. I/O terminals
1-1. Video input terminal
RGB input (Mini D-Sub 15-pin 1 system)
VIDEO input (RCA phono-terminal 1 system)
S-VIDEO (S-terminal 1 system)

1-2. Video output terminal


RGB output (Mini D-Sub 15-pin 1 system)

1-3. Audio input terminal


RGB input (Mini Jack 1 system)
VIDEO input (Stereo RCA phono-terminal 1 system)
S-VIDEO input (Stereo RCA phono-terminal 1 system)

1-4. Audio output terminal


RGB/VIDEO/S-VIDEO in common (Mini Jack 1 system)

1-5. Control terminal


PC CONTROL (Mini DIN-8P 1 system)

1-6. Mouse control output terminal


USB (PC) (USB-B 1 system)

2. Input signals
2-1. Signal level
RGB signal : 0.7Vp-p / 75
Component signal : 1.0Vp-p / 75 (Signal Y), 0.7Vp-p / 75 (Signals Cb/Cr, Pb/Pr)
VIDEO signal : 1.0Vp-p / 75
S-VIDEO signal : 1.0Vp-p / 75 (Signal Y), 0.28Vp-p / 75 (Signal C burst level)
Sync signal : TTL level (Positive/ Negative) / 1k
Audio signal : 0.5Vrms / 22k or more

2-2. RGB signal applied frequency


Horizontal sync frequency : 15 ~ 100kHz
Vertical sync frequency : 50 ~ 120Hz
Max. resolution : UXGA

2-3. Component signals


The applicable component signals are as specified below.
525i, 625i, 480p, 576p (DVD output signal)
720p, 1080i (HDTV signal)

2-4. Video input applied color system


The applicable color system is as specified below.
NTSC3.58
NTSC4.43
PAL
PAL-M
PAL-N
PAL-60
SECAM

6-1
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

3. Circuit operation
3-1. Input processor block (Input block, A/D converter, PLL)
The video signal input entered in Pin 15 of the Mini D-SUB is sent to the A/D converter AD9883A (IC2002) via
the buffer and LPF circuits if it is for the RGB signal. The LPF block has through and two types of filters
which can be chosen by a changeover action.
The video signal is converted into the 8-bit digital signal at the A/D converter, and then output to the PW164B
(IC5004). In the case of Component signals, different signal processing is carried out with 1080i, 720p, 576p,
480p and 525i, 625i. Signals of 1080i, 720p, 576p, 480p, etc., are entered in the PW164B (IC5004) via the A/
D converter. Signals of525i, 625i, etc., are entered in the PW164B (IC5004) via the video decoder. For both
signals, conversion of chroma signals into RGB signals is carried out inside the PW164B (IC5004).
The signals to be used for clamping the video signals required in the A/D converter (clamp pulses, mask
pulses) are generated in the PW164B (IC5004) and are output to the A/D converter. A PLL circuit is incorpo-
rated in the A/D converter. Therefore, the clock and timing pulses locked with the horizontal sync signal are
output to the PW164B (IC5004).
Control of the A/D converter is conducted from the PW164B (IC5004) through I2C.

3-2. Sync signal processor block (Mini D-SUB 15-pin input)


The sync signal input entered in Pin 15 of the Mini D-SUB is sent to the amplitude limiter circuit, where it is
limited to 0.6Vp-p.
Since then, the sync signal input is entered in the sync signal processor IC, M52347FP (IC2001).
In regard to the Sync on Green signal, the signal is entered in the sync signal processor IC via the sync chip
clamp circuit and the amplifier circuit since this signal is also required to be applicable to the attenuated sync
signal.
In the sync signal processor IC, the following processing is carried out:
H/V sync output
Sync separation of Composite Sync and G-Sync
Discrimination of the presence of H/V sync and polarity

3-3. Video signal processor block


After the completion of signal termination, the Composite video signal input is entered in the digital video
decoder, SAA7118 (IC3000), where the video signals of NTSC, PAL, SECAM, etc., are converted and de-
coded into the digital signals and output to the PW164B (IC5004) together with the sync signals.
Control of the video decoder is conducted by the PW164B (IC5004) through I2C.

3-4. RGB output processing


The RGB video signal input entered in Pin 15 of the Mini D-SUB is output via the 6dB amplifier (IC1002) so
that it can be maintained at 1Vp-p when signal termination is completed at 75.
The H sync signal is output through the buffer circuit (Q1003, Q1004).
The V sync signal is output through the buffer circuit (Q1005, Q1006).

3-5. Plug & Play


The V sync terminal of Mini D-SUB 15-pin and the serial terminal of 12, 15-pin are connected to the Plug &
Play IC (IC1001: BR24C21F) so that the projector can be detected at the PC.

3-6. Audio I/O processing


The audio signal input is entered in the output amplifier (IC4014: TDA7056AT) via the audio processor IC
(IC4005: NJW1142M). Either an RGB input (Mini-jack) or a VIDEO input (RCA phono terminal) or an S-
VIDEO (RCA phono terminal) is selected and output. Usually, an internal speaker (4 x 1) is used. At that
time, the audio signal is output (max: 1W) through the mixture of the right and left channel signals. If connec-
tion is made to the AUDIO OUT terminal, the internal speaker is muted and output is given only to the AUDIO
OUT terminal. In this case, the signal output comes in the stereo mode. Even when the AUDIO OUT terminal
is in use, volume control is possible.
Volume control is conducted at the audio processor IC, by I2C control at the PW164B (IC5004).

6-2
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

3-7. Protector
If any one of the conditions below is sensed, the projector causes the status LED to flash and the standby
status is recovered.
Sensed when the lamp cover is removed
Detection of fan (x 3) stoppage
Detection of lamp non-lighting
Detection of fan rpm control and abnormal temperature by temperature sensor

3-8. PW164B (IC5004) (CPU, video signal processor)


The PW164B (IC5004) is an LSI where the CPU and the video signal processor circuit are combined. In this
LSI, various controls are carried out, such as conversion of resolution, keystone correction, frame rate con-
version, OSD output processing, and such video signal processing plus projector control.
Programs and data used in the CPU are stored in the 8-Mbit flash ROM (IC5006) and the EEPROM (IC5003).
The RGB signals and the Component signals like 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i, etc., are entered from the A/D
converter AD9883A (IC2002) in the 8-bit x 3 (R/G/B or Y/Pb/Pr or Y/Cb/Cr) mode. The video signals and the
signals like 525i, 625i, etc., are entered from the video decoder SAA7118 (IC3000) in the 8-bit x 2 (Y/UV)
mode. The video output of the A/D converter is entered in the graphic port (GPORT) of the PW164B (IC5004)
and that of the video decoder is entered in the display port (VPORT) of the PW164B (IC5004).
In the PW164, two types of clock signals are used, such as 120MHz and 63.6MHz (PWC-4541) or 40MHz
(PWC-4546). The 120MHz clock signal (X5002) is used in the CPU block (3-frequency-divided internally)
and the internal SDRAM. The 63.6MHz or 40MHz clock signal (X5001) is used in the video output block. In
any case, the clock signals pass through the clock modulator IC (IC5002, 5005) and are entered in the
PW164B (IC5004). The 8-bit x 3 video signal output from the PW164B (IC5004) is directly entered in the
UNISIX (IC8002).

3-9. UN ISIX
The UNISIX (IC8002) is an ASIC circuit with many useful functions, such as various kinds of correction,
timing signal generation, CPU peripheral circuits, etc., specified below.
V-T correction
Chromatic unevenness correction
Color correction
Fan rpm control (x 3)
Remote control signal decoding (noise canceller circuit incorporated) and re-encoding
Timing signal generation for LCD panel driving
Correction for LCD panel driving (ghost, vertical line, 1-dot convergence)
CPU interface
Key input matrix
The video signal input entered from the PW164B (IC5004) in the 8-bit x 3 mode is output to the LCD panel
driver IC (IC9001-3) in the 10-bit x 3 mode through each compensation circuit.
UNISIX control is carried out in the state that the register address-mapped in the UNISIX is controlled by the
PW164B (IC5004).

3-10. Video output processor block


The 10-bit x 3 video signal input entered from the UNISIX (IC8002) is processed for the D/A conversion and
the level conversion at the LCD panel driver IC (IC9001-3). These signals are fed to the LCD panel after the
signals have been restored to the respective analog RGB signals (10Vp-p) of 6 phases each.
The timing signals for LCD panel driving are converted into the voltages (15.5Vp-p/PWC-4541, 5Vp-p/PWC-
4546) needed to drive the shift register in the LCD panel. This signal conversion is effected by the level shift
IC (IC9501-3/PWC-4541, IC9501-6/PWC-4546). The obtained voltages are applied to the LCD panel. Part of
the signals (uniformity improving signal/PWC-4546, etc.) for LC driving are supplied to the LCD panel through
the buffer circuit of transistors. The voltage used in common for the LCD panel is extended to each panel of
RGB by the use of Channel 3 of the 8-ch serial D/A (IC9005: M62393FP).

6-3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

3-11. Auto-trapezoid correction processing


The PJ gradient is sensed by the gravity acceleration sensor (IC7002) and trapezoid correction (keystone) is
automatically carried out. The gravity acceleration sensor generates a DC voltage output according to the
inclination of the projector. The output voltage is applied to the A/D converter terminal of the temperature
sensor (IC6005) via the OP amplifier (IC7003). The data received at the A/D converter are read out through
the I2C data bus so that operational processing can be conducted at the PW164B (IC5004).

3-12. I2C data bus control


The PW164B (IC5004) has two systems of I2C bus interfaces. The six devices specified below are controlled
from each interface.
I2C BUS I/F1 (BUS No. 1): Normal operation
I2C BUS I/F2 (BUS No. 2): Operation only in Power-On mode

Circuit symbol Item name BUS No Address (Write) Address (Read) Functions
IC2002 AD9883AKST-110 2 9AH 9BH A/D converter
IC3000 SAA7118 (DECODER) 2 42H 43H Video decoder
IC4005 NJW1142M 2 82H 83H Audio processor
IC5003 CAT24WC32J-TE13 1 A0H A1H 32-Kbit EEPROM
IC6005 AD7417ARU-REEL7 2 90H 91H Temperature sensor
IC9005 M62393FP-D 2 98H 8-ch D/A converter

6-4
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

[Materials 1] Connector terminal allocation


The terminal allocation of the connectors used is shown below.
Between MAIN PWB and LCD panel (PWC-4546) Between MAIN PWB and LCD panel (PWC-4541)
PORS, POGS, POBS POPR, POPG, POPB
1 PSIG 13 HST 1 N.C 16 VDDX
2 SIG4 14 HCK 2 DY 17 DX
3 SIG3 15 HCKX 3 CLY 18 VSSX
4 SIG5 16 VSS 4 CLYB 19 VID1
5 SIG2 17 N.C. 5 VDDY 20 VID2
6 SIG6 18 ENB 6 LCCOM 21 VID3
7 SIG1 19 VCK 7 N.C. 22 VID4
8 HVDD 20 VST 8 NRG 23 VID5
9 RGT 21 PCG 9 ENB1 24 VID6
10 CLR 22 DWN 10 ENB2 25 N.C.
11 N.C. 23 VVDD 11 ENB3 26 LCCOM
12 N.C. 24 COM 12 ENB4 27 DIRY
13 DIRX 28 VSSY
Between I/O PWB and MAIN PWB
14 CLX 29 DY
POI-POIB 15 CLXB 30 MON
1 GND 19 SDA
2 ALIN 20 SCL Between POWER and MAIN PWB
3 GND 21 GND POPW
4 ARIN 22 5VIN 1 +3.3V 9 GND
5 GND 23 GND 2 +3.3V 10 GND
6 ALOUT 24 ROUT 3 +3.3V 11 +14.0V
7 JSW 25 GND 4 GND 12 +14.0V
8 AROUT 26 GOUT 5 GND 13 GND
9 GND 27 GND 6 GND 14 +17.0V
10 RIN 28 BOUT 7 +6.2V 15 GND
11 GND 29 GND 8 +6.2V
12 GIN 30 HOUT
13 GND 31 GND Between Ballast POWER and MAIN PWB
14 BIN 32 VOUT POLC
15 GND 33 THRM2 1 LAMP_DET
16 HIN 34 +3.3V 2 GND
17 SCART 35 GND 3 +3.3V
18 VIN 36 REM 4 LAMP_PW
Between MAIN PWB and Cooling Fan 5 LAMP_CTL
POF1, POF2, POF3
1 VCC Between MAIN PWB and Thermistor
2 GND POT1, POT2
3 FAN_DET 1 AIN
2 GND
Between MAIN PWB and Speaker
POSP Between MAIN PWB and Thermostat
1 AUD+ POBM
2 N.C. 1 STBY OUT
3 AUD- 2 STBY IN
6-5
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

[Materials 2] List of ICs used


A list of ICs used is shown below.

PWC-4541 PWC-4546
Type description Explanation
Qty Circuit symbol Qty Circuit symbol
1 IC1001 1 BR24C21F-E2 For PLUG & PLAY EEPROM
1 IC1002 1 NJM2581M Video AMP
1 IC2001 1 M52347FP-600C Sync separation IC
1 IC2002 1 AD9883AKST-110 A/D converter
1 IC2003 1 NJM2861F05 Voltage Regulator
1 IC2004 1 TL3016CDR (COMP) Comparator
1 IC201 1 TSOP1838SB3V Remote control light receiver
1 IC3000 1 SAA7118 (DECODER) Video decoder
1 IC4001 1 SI-3011ZD Voltage Regulator
IC4002, IC4006, IC4002, IC4006,
4 4 PQ20WZ1U Voltage Regulator
IC9004, IC9504 IC9004, IC9507
1 IC4005 1 NJW1142M Audio processor
IC4007, IC6002,
4 4 PQ20WZ5U (REG) Voltage Regulator
IC6004, IC6007
1 IC4012 1 TPS60403 Voltage Inverter
1 IC4014 1 TDA7056AT/N2 Audio processor
1 IC5002 1 P2040A-08SR Clock modulation IC (EMI reduction)
1 IC5003 1 CAT24WC32J-TE13 32Kbit EEPROM
1 IC5004 1 PW164B-10TK PixelWorks (Scaling IC accommodated in CPU)
1 IC5005 1 P2160A-08SR Clock modulation IC (EMI reduction)
1 IC5006 1 LH28F800BJE 8-Mbit flash memory
2 IC5007, IC5008 2 NC7WZ32K8X General-purpose logic (OR gate)
1 IC6001 1 TSOP1838SS3V Remote control light receiver
1 IC6003 1 NB60-9704-V902 USB mouse control IC
1 IC6005 1 AD7417ARU-REEL7 Temperature sensor
1 IC6006 1 ADM3202ARN-REEL RS-232C driver
1 IC7001 1 SLA5075H (TINYCELL) TINYCELL (gate array)
1 IC7002 1 MXA2500GL Gravity acceleration sensor
IC7003, IC9007,
3 3 NJM324V-TE1 OP AMP
IC9008
1 IC8001 1 BD4725G Reset IC
1 IC8002 1 UPD85027S1-011-F6 UNISIX (ASIC)
3 IC9001-IC9003 AD8381JST LCD panel driver
3 IC9001-IC9003 CXA7000R LCD panel driver
1 IC9005 1 M62393FP-D 8-ch D/A converter
1 IC9006 1 NJM431U-TE1 Voltage Regulator
3 IC9501-IC9503 L3E01040F0A Level shift AMP
6 IC9501-IC9506 TC74VHCT240AFT General-purpose logic (3-state buffer)

6-6
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Operational Sequence of the VT60 System with the Power ON

Processing Device Status Remark

Power ON POWER LED lit in Orange Green


IC8002 314PIN L H (3.3V)

RCLK ON IC5004 23PIN L H (3.3V) RCLK=IC5002 6PIN

L/S reset canceled IC5004 25PIN L H (3.3V) VT/660/VT560


COVER DET/LAMPHOT check

FAN revolution start IC8002 119PIN L H (3.3V)


(FAN revolution check)

(I2C device initialized)


(Thermistor connection check)

LAMP lighting IC8002 315PIN L H (3.3V)


(POWER LED flashing in green)
Video display

Audio mute canceled IC7001 90PIN H L (0V)

6-7
6-8

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Light Path Figure (VT60)
Integrator 2 PBS
Integrator 1 Field lens
Dichroic mirror 1
Dichroic mirror 2
Condenser lens G Relay lens 1

Polarizer G

UV Cut filter
LCD G Relay lens 2
Lamp Sub filter G
Analyzer G Mirror 2

Mirror 1
Condenser lens R Condenser lwns B
Polarizer R Polarizer B
LCD R LCD B
Sub filter R Sub filter B
Analyzer R Analyzer B

Projection lens
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY
1. Diagonal view of the main unit front

7-1
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY

2. LAMP COVER ASSY/LAMP/HOLDER (FILTER) COVER ASSY


(1) Loosen the one screw 1 of the LAMP COVER 2) Take out the HOLDER (FILTER) COVER ASSY.

2
ASSY and take out this LAMP COVER ASSY.
Loosen the two screws of the LAMP and take it
out.

LAMP
(OPTION)
2

HOLDER (FILTER) ASSY


LAMP COVER ASSY
24FT8781
1 24FT8771

7-2
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY

3. TOP COVER ASSY/SPEAKER/BRACKET (SP)


1
(1) Remove the five screws and the two screws 3 (2) Remove the two screws 2 and take out the
and take out the TOP COVER ASSY. SPEAKER/BRACKET (SP).

3 TOP COVER ASSY


2DT8821 (VT660 Series)
2DT8831 (VT560 series)
2DT8841 (VT460 Series)

SPEAKER
6N300010

BRACKET(SP)
24H44301

7-3
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY

4. MAIN PWB SASSY


1
2 3
(1) Remove the three screws and the two screws
, and the one screw , and take out the MAIN
PWB SASSY.

MAIN PWB SASSY


(Refer to P7-5)

7-4
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY

5. MAIN PWB ASSY/BRACKET (I/O) ASSY


1 2
3
(1) Remove the two screws and the one screw ,
and the four screw , and take out the MAIN PWB
ASSY.

24N05831
Accessory screws DECORATED PLATE (I/O)
for D-SUB15 24K25451
3 2
1

BRACKET (I/O)
24H44281 BARRIER (I/O) ASSY
24JS1612 MAIN PWB ASSY
82G32F02 (VT660 Series, VT560 Series)
82G26F01 (VT460 Series)

7-5
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY

6. DC FAN/GUARD (FAN)
(1) Remove the two screws 1 and take out the DC (2) Remove the two screws 2 and take out the DC
FAN/GUARD (FAN). FAN.

GUARD (FAN)
24H44341

DC FAN
3N170037

7-6
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY

7. PS SASSY/GUARD (BS)
(1) Remove the five screws 1 and take out the PS (2) Remove the one screw 2 and take out the GUARD
SASSY. (BS).

PS SASSY
(Refer to P8-3, P8-4)

GUARD (BS)
24H44771

7-7
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY

8. ENGINE SASSY/ DC FAN


(1) Remove the five screws 1 and take out theENGINE (2) Take out the DC FAN.
SASSY.

DC FAN
3N170036

BARRIER (FAN)
24J22171

7-8
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY

9. POWER SUPPLY UNIT


(1) Remove the two screws 1 and take out the POWER
SUPPLY UNIT.

POWER SUPPLY UNIT


3N100381

7-9
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY

10. DC FAN/DUCT A ASSY


(1) Remove the four screws 1 and take out the DUCT
A ASSY.
(2) Take out the DC FAN.

DUCT A ASSY
24FT8881

DC FAN
3N170035

(* HANDLE not included)

BOTTOM COVER ASSY


24DT8851

When ordering the Bottom Cover ASSY, the Barrier (Fan) should
also be ordered at the same time. (Refer to Pages 7 and 8.)

7-10
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY

11.BRACKET (TOP HOLD)/HANDEL/FOOT


(1) Remove the one screw 1 and take out the (2) Remove the two screws 2 , and take out the
BRACKET (TOP HOLD). HANDLE.
(3) Remove the BUSH NUT and take out the FOOT.

1
BRACKET (TOP HOLD)
24H46701

BUSH NUT (3.0)


24N06001

HANDLE
24F38031(Accsesory)
2
SPRING (FOOT)
24H44271 HOLDER (FOOT)
BUTTON (FOOT) 24F37361
24G08051

FOOT F
24F37351
9101311L

7-11
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY

12.ENGINE SASSY

7-12
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY

13.COVER (OPT)
(1) Remove the two screws 1 and take out the
COVER (OPT).

COVER (OPT)
24F36921

7-13
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY

14.OPT BASE SASSY


(1) Remove the four screws 1 and take out the OPT
BASE SASSY.

OPT BASE SASSY


82G32111 or 82G32131(VT660 Series)
82G29111 or 82G29131(VT560 Series)
82G26111 or82G26131(VT460 Series)
(* Zoom lens included)

7-14
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY

15.POL G SASSY/COVER A/PBS SASSY/THERMOSTAT SASSY/COVER B


(1) Remove the one screw1 and take out the POL G (4) Remove the one screw4and take out the THER-

2 5
SASSY. MOSTAT SASSY.
(2) Remove the five screws and take out the (5) Remove the two screws and take out the

3
COVER A. COVER B.
(3) Remove the two screws and take out the PBS
SASSY.

POL G SASSY
q 82G32271
(Refer to P9-12)
PBS SASSY
82G32231 w

t t

COVER A
24F36901

COVER B
24F36911

THERMOSTAT SASSY
82G32711
(Refer to P9-7)

7-15
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY

16.IT1 SASSY/IT2 SASSY/FL SASSY/M1 SASSY/RL2 SASSY/DICHROIC MIRROR 1/


DICHROIC MIRROR 2/CONDENSER LENS-R/G/B/RELAY LENS 1/POLARIZER R/B
(1) Remove the one screw 1 and take out the IT1 (5) Remove the one screw 5
and take out the RL2

the one screw 2 and take out the IT2


SASSY. SASSY.
(2) Remove (6) Remove the SPRING and take out the DICHROIC

the two screws 3 and take out the FL


SASSY. MIRROR 1/DICHROIC MIRROR 2.
(3) Remove (7) Take out the CONDENSER LENS-R/G/B/RELAY

the one screw 4 and take out the M1


SASSY. LENS 1/POLARIZER R/B.
(4) Remove
SASSY.

DICHROIC MIRROR 2
12JS4551

DICHROIC MIRROR 1 UV CUT FILTER


MIRROR 2
12JS4541 12JS4561
12JS2581
FL SASSY 3 SPRING SPRING
(Refer to P9-8) RL2 SASSY
24H43991 24H43991 SPRING (Refer to P9-8)
24H43991

MIRROR 2
5
IT 2 SASSY 12JS2581
82G32221
2
4
SPRING
24H43991
1

CONDENSER LENS-B
12JS4531

POLARIZER B
12JS4611

RELAY LENS-1
IT 1 SASSY POLARIZER R 12JS4491
82G32211 12JS4591
CONDENSER LENS-G
CONDENSER LENS-R 12JS4521
12JS4511
M1 SASSY
82G32261

7-16
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY

Disassembly Procedures (How to remove each ASSY)


1. Removal of the TOP COVER ASSY
Diagonal view of the main unit front
Remove the two screws of the
rear part.

LAMP COVER ASSY Remove the connector of the


speaker.

Loosen the screw of the LAMP COVER


ASSY.

Remove the five screws from the


set bottom.

7-17
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY

2. Removal of the MAIN PWB SASSY

Remove the three screws located on top of


the MAIN PWB ASSY.

Remove the two screws.

Remove the one screw and then each connector


that is connected to the MAIN PWB ASSY.
Take out the MAIN PWB SASSY.

7-18
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY

3. Removal of the OPT BASE SASSY

This action can be taken after the


removal of the TOP COVER ASSY
and the MAIN PWB ASSY.
(Refer to the previous Items 1 and 2.)

Remove the two screws and take


out the COVER (OPT).

Remove the four screws and take


out the OPT BASE SASSY.

7-19
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY

4. Removal of the ENGINE SASSY

This action can be taken after the removal of the


TOP COVER ASSY and the MAIN PWB ASSY.
(Refer to the previous Items 1 and 2.)

Remove the five screws. Remove the two screws and take
out the LAMP connector.

Loosen the two screws of the LAMP and take


out the LAMP.

Take out the ENGINE SASSY.

7-20
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY

5. Removal of the POWER SUPPLY UNIT

This action can be taken after the


removal of the TOP COVER ASSY
and the MAIN PWB ASSY.
(Refer to the previous Items 1 and 2.)

Remove the two screws and take


out the POWER SUPPLY UNIT.

6. Removal of the DC FAN

This action can be taken after the


removal of the TOP COVER ASSY.
(Refer to the previous Items 1)

Remove the two screws and take


out the POWER SUPPLY UNIT.

7. Removal of the PS SASSY

This action can be taken after the


removal of the TOP COVER ASSY,
the MAIN PWB ASSY, and the
ENGINE SASSY.
(Refer to the previous Items 1, 2,
and 4.)

Remove the five screws and then


the 2P connector that is connected
to the POWER SUPPLY UNIT.
Take out the PS SASSY.

7-21
DISASSEMBLY
SRW030 Refer to the Parts List in regard to the part name
MAIN PWB SASSY LAMP SASSY SRW032 and the part number of each screw.
(Refer to P7-5) 82G32161
SRW013

SRW012 TOP COVER ASSY


LAMP COVER ASSY 24DT8821 (VT660 Series)
24FT8771 24DT8831 (VT560 Series)
24DT8841 (VT460 Series)

SRW011

SRW020
SRW002
SRW020 DUCT A ASSY
24FT8881 SRW009
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N100381

SPEAKER
DC FAN 6N300010
3N170036

DC FAN
SRW010 BRACKET (SP)
BARRIER (FAN) 3N170035
24H44301
24J22171 SRW070

BUSH NUT BRACKET (TOP HOLD)


24N06001 24H46701
PS SASSY
(Refer to P8-3, P8-4)
HOLDER (FILTER) ASSY
24FT8781
SRW005 SRW003
GUARD (FAN)
24H44341

SPRING (FOOT)
24H44271
DC FAN BUTTON (FOOT)
SRW084
3N170037 SRW031 24G08051
SRW003
SRW031 HOLDER (FOOT)
24F37361
BOTTOM COVER ASSY 9101311L
GUARD (BS) 24DT8851
24H44771 FOOT F
HANDLE 24F37351
SRW031
24F38031
SPRING (FOOT)
24H44271 HOLDER (FOOT)
SRW001 24F37361
BUTTON (FOOT)
24G08051 FOOT F
9101311L 24F37351
8-1
DISASSEMBLY

SRW104
COVER(OPT)
SRW106 24F36921
POL G SASSY
82G32271
(Refer to P9-12)

SRW105

COVER A
24F36901
SRW102
SRW103 PBS SASSY
82G32231 SRW105
SRW103
SRW102
SRW103

DICHROIC MIRROR 2
SRW106 12JS4551

DICHROIC MIRROR 1
SPRING
12JS4541
FL SASSY SPRING 24H43991
(Refer to P9-8) 24H43991
MIRROR 2
12JS2581 UV CUT FILTER
COVER B 12JS4561
SPRING
24F36911 SRW106
24H43991

RELAY LENS-1 RL2 SASSY


12JS4491 (Refer to P9-8)
THERMOSTAT SASSY
82G32711 SRW106
(Refer to P9-7) M1 SASSY OPT BASE SASSY
SRW102 82G32261 82G32111 or 82G32131 (VT660 Series)
82G29111 or 82G29131 (VT560 Series)
SPRING 82G26111 or 82G26131 (VT460 Series)
IT 2 SASSY
24H43991
82G32221
CONDENSER LENS-B
12JS4531
IT 1 SASSY
82G32211

POLARIZER B
12JS4611

MIRROR 2
12JS2581

CONDENSER LENS-G
12JS4521

POLARIZER R
12JS4591
CONDENSER LENS-R
12JS4511

8-2
DISASSEMBLY

PS SASSY

SRW084
SRW083

SHIELD (POWER)
24H44311

SRW082

BARRIER (POWER)
24J20821

POWER SUPPLY UNIT


3N100371

SRW081

BARRIER (DC/BS)
24J21541

SHIELD (PS/BS)
24H44321

8-3
DISASSEMBLY

PS SASSY

POWER SUPPLY UNIT (BS)


3N100391

BARRIER (BS)
24J20841

SHIELD (BS)
24H44761

PWB HOLDER
24C01001

8-4
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM
Assembly Diagram 1 PS SASSY
Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part code Qty Remarks

101 SHIELD (BS) 24H44761 1


102 PWB HOLDER 24C01001 4 Insert the holder in the shield.

201 POWER SUPPLY UNIT (BS) 3N100391 1


202 POLC CONNECTOR 5pin 160mm 1 Insert the connector in the ballast post.
203 BARRIER (BS) 24J20841 1 Cover the ballast with the barrier.
Set the PWB holder in 4 positions.

301 SHIELD (PS/BS) 24H44321 1


302 SRW081 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF 910E251L 2 Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf
303 BARRIER (DC/BS) 24J21541 1

401 POWER SUPPLY UNIT 3N100371 1


402 CN2 CN 3P (CP1) 220W, 1015-22 7NW3W023 1 Insert the connector in Post CN2 of the PS source.
403 POPW CONNECTOR 15pin 125mm 1 Insert the connector in Post CN101 of the PS source.

404 SRW082 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF 910E251L 3 Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf

501 SHIELD (POWER) 24H44311 1


502 BARRIER (POWER) 24J20821 1
503 SRW083 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF 910E251L 3 Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf
504 SRW080 STUD (M3/M2.5*H8.8) 24N06201 1 Torque: 4~6kgf

601 CABLE CLIP (FCA-10) 24C02841 1

701 CUSHION 1

101 102

The clamper should be stuck to the place 203


where it does not interfere with the
screwdriver bit when the PS_SASSY is 701
fastened to the bottom with screws.
601 201

301

303
202

401

302

501 502
402

404
403

503

504

9-1
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 2 BOTTOM SASSY


Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part code Qty Remarks

101 BOTTOM COVER ASSY (VT660) 24DT8851 1


102 BARRIER (FAN) 24J22171 1 Stick the barrier (FAN) to the bottom.

103 TH001 104JT-075-20206 3N810002 1

104 Scotch tape SUPER 10 10MM*55M 92203961 1 Fasten the thermistor to the bottom by
means of an adhesive tape.

111 DC FAN TYF300J12 3N170035 1 Put the fan on the bottom.

201 DUCT A ASSY 24FT8881 1


202 CUSHION (FAN) 24J21511 2 Stick the cushion to the duct.
203 CUSHION (I) 24J21501 1 Stick the cushion to the duct.
204 BARRIER (DUCT) 24J22181 1 Stick the cushion to the duct.
211 CUSHION (L) 24J21491 1 Stick the cushion to the duct.

301 SRW090 #2CBTS*3*10*15BF 91613061 4 Torque: 6~8kgf

Outside of the duct Inside of the duct


301 301 203
202
201

301
202 204

301
211

101

111

102 103
104 Thermistor position

9-2
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 3 HOLDER (FILTER) ASSY & POWER SUPPLY UNIT


Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part code Qty Remarks

DC FAN TYF300J12 3N170035 1


101 BOTTOM SASSY 1

102 HOLDER (FILTER) ASSY 24FT8781 1

103 Scotch tape SUPER 10 10MM*55M 92203961 1

201 BRACKET (TOP HOLD) 24H46701 1 Fasten the metal fittings to the bottom with screws.
202 SRW004 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF 910E251L 1 Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf

301 GUARD (BS) 24H44771 1


302 SRW003 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF 910E251L 1 Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf
Fasten the guard to the bottom with screws.

401 PS SASSY 1 Wiring: As specified in the diagram below.


402 SRW010 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF 910E251L 5 Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf

411 POWER SUPPLY UNIT 3N100381 1

412 SRW002 SCREW 2CBTS*3*10*15BF 91613061 2 Torque: 4~6kgf


Fasten the PS filter PWB to the bottom with screws.
Insert the wiring materials of the PS source
in Post CN201 of the PS filter PWB.

202

The wiring materials between the PS and the ballast should be passed
inside the boss of the bottom.
201
401 402

103

102

301

101
302

CN201

411
412

9-3
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 4 DC FAN


Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part code Qty Remarks

101 DC FAN D08A-12PG 3N170037 1


103 GUARD (FAN) 24H44341 1
104 SRW001 PL-CPIMS*3*32*15BF 910E3141 2 Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf
Fasten the fan to the guard with screws.

201 Scotch tape SUPER 10 10MM*55M 92203961 1 Fasten the wiring materials of the fan with
an adhesive tape.

301 SRW005 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF 910E251L 1 Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf


Fasten the fan to the bottom with screws.
302 SRW006 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF 910E251L 1 Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf
Fasten the fan to the bottom with screws.

101
103

104

104

302

301

9-4
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 5 SEPARATE BASE (B39)


Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part code Qty Remarks

101 SEPARATE BASE (B39) 24F36891 1


102 CUSHION (F15 ) 24J21471 1 Stick the cushion to the separation base.
103 CUSHION (F2) 24J21841 1 Stick the cushion to the separation base.
104 CUSHION FAN) 24J21511 2 Stick the cushion to the separation base.

102
103

101

104

9-5
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 6 DC FAN & SEPARATE BASE SASSY


Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part code Qty Remarks

101 DC FAN A33999-58NEC 3N170036 1

201 SEPARATE BASE SASSY 1


202 SRW020 #2CBTS*3*10*15BF 91613061 5 Torque: 6~8kgf
Fasten the fan to the guard with screws.

101 201
202

9-6
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 7 IT1 SASSY/IT2 SASSY & THERMOSTAT SASSY


Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part code Qty Remarks

101 SRW101 PL-CPIMS*2.5*10*15BF 910E2531 2 Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf

111 IT1 SASSY 82G32211 1


112 IT2 SASSY 82G32221 1
113 SRW102 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF 910E251L 2 Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf

201 COVER B 24F36911 1


202 SRW103 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF 910E251L 2 Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf
Fasten the Cover D with screws.

211 PBS SASSY 82G32231 1


212 SRW102 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF 910E251L 2 Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf
Fasten the PBS with screws.
THERMOSTAT SASSY 82G32711 1 THERMOSTATS (7N970022)
CONNECTOR 2P L60 (7NW20019)
PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF 910E251L 1 Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf

212
202
211
201

112 113 111 101

301

302

9-7
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 8 FIELD LENS SASSY & RL2 SASSY


Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part code Qty Remarks

101 BRACKET (FL) 24H43951 1


102 FIELD LENS SASSY 82G32311 1
103 SRW113 SPECIAL SCREW (PL-HM2.5*6) 12851741 2 Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf

103

103

102

101

Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part code Qty Remarks

101 BRACKET (RL2) 24H43961 1


102 RL2 SASSY 82G32321 1
103 SRW114 SPECIAL SCREW (PL-HM2.5*6) 12851741 1 Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf

101

103

102

9-8
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Asembly Diagram 9 FL SASSY/RL2 SASSY & M1 SASSY


Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part code Qty Remarks

101 FL SASSY 82G32241 1


102 SRW106 SPECIAL SCREW (PL-HM2.5*6) 12851741 2 Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf

111 RL2 SASSY 82G32251 1


112 SRW106 SPECIAL SCREW (PL-HM2.5*6) 12851741 1 Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf

121 M1 SASSY 82G32261 1


122 SRW106 SPECIAL SCREW (PL-HM2.5*6) 12851741 1 Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf

122 121

112

111

102 101

9-9
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 10 OPTICAL PARTS


Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part code Qty Remarks

101 DICHROIC MIRROR 1 (PB39) 12JS4541 1 Direction: The mark should be directed to the top and XDP side.
102 DICHROIC MIRROR 2 (PB39) 12JS4551 1 Direction: The mark should be directed to the top and XDP side.

111 RELAY LENS 1 (PB39) 12JS4491 1

112 MIRROR 2 (PB24) 12JS2581 2 Direction: The mark should be directed to the top and zoom lens
side.

113 UV CUT FILTER (PB39) 12JS4561 1 Direction: The mark should be directed to the top and XDP side.

121 POLARIZER B (PB39) 12JS4611 1 Direction: The mark should be directed to the top and zoom lens
side.
122 POLARIZER R (PB39) 12JS4591 1 Direction: The mark should be directed to the top and zoom lens
side.

131 CONDENSER LENS-B (PB39) 12JS4531 1 Direction: The convex plane should be directed to the opposite
side of XDP.
132 CONDENSER LENS-G (PB39) 12JS4521 1 Direction: The convex plane should be directed to the opposite
side of XDP.
133 CONDENSER LENS-R (PB39) 12JS4511 1 Direction: The convex plane should be directed to the opposite
side of XDP.

141 SPRING (B39) 24H43991 8 DICHROIC MIRROR 1 x2


DICHROIC MIRROR 2 x2
MIRROR 2 x4

121 The mark should be directed to the top 131 The convex plane should be directed
to the opposite side of XDP.
and zoom lens side.
132 The convex plane should be directed 141: I n 8 p o s i t i o n s o f t h e
The mark should be to the opposite side of XDP. triangular mark in the
directed to the top The convex plane should be directed diagram
122 and zoom lens side. 133 to the opposite side of XDP.

112
The mark should be
directed to the top
and zoom lens side.

113
The mark should be
directed to the top
and XDP side.

112
The mark should be
directed to the top
and zoom lens side.

111 102 101


The mark should be The mark should be
directed to the top directed to the top
and XDP side. and XDP side.

9-10
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 11 COVER SASSY


Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part code Qty Remarks

101 COVER A 24F36901 1


102 CUSHION A 24J21481 5 Stick the cushion to the cover.

103 COVER A SASSY 1


104 SRW105 SCREW, CBIPS*3*10*15KF 25851411 5 Torque: 4~6kgf

101
102

103

104

9-11
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 12 POLARIZER G


Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part code Qty Remarks

101 HOLDER (POLG) 24F36951 1


102 POLARIZER G (PB39) 12JS4601 1

103 POLG SASSY 82G32271 1


104 SPECIAL SCREW (PL-HM2.5*6) 12851741 1 Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf

102

3
Direction of the polarizer
(Side view)

Holder

Polarizer
1
Convex plane
101

101

102

9-12
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 13 OPT BASE SASSY


Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part code Qty Remarks

101 LAMP SASSY OPTION 1


Torque: 4~6kgf

111 OPT BASE SASSY 82G32131 1 VT660 Series


111 OPT BASE SASSY 82G32111 OR VT660 Series
111 OPT BASE SASSY 82G29131 1 VT560 Series
111 OPT BASE SASSY 82G29111 OR VT560 Series
111 OPT BASE SASSY 82G26131 1 VT460 Series
111 OPT BASE SASSY 82G26111 OR VT460 Series

112 SRW102 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF 910E251L 4/8 Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf

201 COVER (OPT) 24F36921 1


202 SRW104 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF 910E251L 2 Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf

112
111

Decoration screw for


the lamp SASSY

101

202

201
202

9-13
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 14 MAIN PWB SASSY


Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part code Qty Remarks

101 MAIN PWB ASSY 82G32F02 1 VT660 Series, VT560 Series


82G26F01 1 VT460 Series

102 BARRIER (I/O) ASSY 24JS1612 1 Stick the barrier to the metal fitting of the
MAIN PWB ASSY.
103 BRACKET (I/O) ASSY 24HS3382 1
201 CUSHION (LED) 24J21881 1 Stick the surface cushion (SIDE-A) of the
MAIN PWB ASSY.

301 SRW102 BARRIER (LAMP) 24J21771 1 Stick the barrier to the side of IC8002,
which is located on the rear side (SIDE-B)
of the MAIN PWB ASSY.

Stick the LED cushion between LEDs.


201

101 (BRACKET(I/O)ASSY not included)

102

Stick the barrier 301


(lamp) to the side
of IC8002 located
on the rear side
103 (SIDE-B) of the
MAIN_PWB.

9-14
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 15 MAIN PWB SASSY


Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part code Qty Remarks

101 MAIN PWB ASSY 81G32F02 1 VT660 Series, VT560 Series


101 MAIN PWB ASSY 81G26F01 1 VT460 Series
102 BARRIER (LAMP) 24J21771 1
201 SRW013 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF 910E251L 2 Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf Fasten the MAINPWB
with screws.
202 SRW014 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF 910E251L 1 Torque : 2.5~3.5kgf
203 SRW011 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF 910E251L 1 Torque : 2.5~3.5kgf
301 SRW012 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF 910E251L 2 Torque : 2.5~3.5kgf Fasten the I/O panel
of the MAIN_PWB with screws from behind.
Make sure not to pinch the wiring materials.
Clamp the wiring materials of the PS source
to the PS source.
Insert the following in the MAIN PWB:
Flexible RGB of the OPT base ASSY POR/G/B
Wiring materials of the PS fan POF3
Wiring materials of the thermistor POT2
Wiring materials of the ballast power supply POLC
Wiring materials of the lamp fan POF2
Wiring materials of the thermostat SASSY POBM
Wiring materials of the OPT fan POF1

Clamp the wiring materials of the PS source.

POF1 OPT fan POR/G/B OPT base SASSY 202 POPW PS source

POF3 Souece fan

POT2 Thermistor

POLC Ballasr SASSY

POF2 Lamp fan

POLC Thermostat SASSY

201

203 101
102
101
Stick the barrier (lamp)
to the side of IC8002
located on the side
plane (SIDE-B) of the
MAIN_PWB.

301

9-15
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 16 TOP COVER ASSY


Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part code Qty Remarks

101 SPEAKER 40*40MM 4H 1W 6N300010 1


102 CUSHION (SP) B 24J21461 1
103 BRACKET (SP) 24H44301 1

104 TOP COVER ASSY (VT660) 24DT8821 1 VT660 Series


104 TOP COVER ASSY (VT560) 24DT8831 1 VT560 Series
104 TOP COVER ASSY (VT460) 24DT8841 1 VT460 Series

105 SRW070 #2CBRTS*3*8*15KF 91663053 2 Torque: 6~8kgf

201 Scotch tape SUPER 10 10MM*55M 92203961 1 Tape length Approx. 90mm
202 Scotch tape SUPER 10 10MM*55M 92203961 1 Tape length Approx. 40mm

105

103
105

102

101

104

201 202

9-16
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 17 TOP COVER ASSY


Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part code Qty Remarks

101 TOP COVER ASSY 24DT8821 1 VT660 Series Speakers not included
101 TOP COVER ASSY 24DT8831 1 VT560 Series Speakers not included
101 TOP COVER ASSY 24DT8841 1 VT460 Series Speakers not included

102 CAUTION LABEL (SERVICE) 24L50191 1 Stick the label to the inside of the top cover.
Direction: The label top should be made to
face the set front.

Insert the speaker wiring materials in the


Post POSP of the MAINPWB.
Cover the set with the top cover.
Be careful not to pinch the wiring materials.

201 SRW030 SL-CPIMS*2.5*6*15KF 910D2533 1 Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf


202 SRW032 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF 910E251L 1 Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf

301 SRW031 PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF 910E251L 5 Torque: 2.5~3.5kgf

401 LAMP COVER ASSY (VT660) 24FT8771 1


402 CAUTION LABEL (LAMP COVER) 24L50011 1 Stick the label to the inside of the lamp cover.
Fasten the decoration screw of the lamp cover.
Torque: 4~6kgf

Speaker

P0SP

101 102
Make the label top face the set front. 201

402 401

202

Decoration
screw of the
lamp cover

301

9-17
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

Assembly Diagram 18 CAUTION LABEL


Diagram symbol Circuit symbol Part name Part code Qty Remarks

101 LENS CAP (PB39) 24F38091 1


201 CAUTION LABEL (LENS4) 24L50021 1 Make the label top face the set top.
301 CAUTION LABEL (LAMP) 24L49521 1 Make the label top face the set top.
401 CAUTION LABEL (FILTER) 24L50001 1 Make the label top face the filter.
402 LABEL, SERIAL MANUFACTURE 18775141 1 Make the label top face the set front.

403 NAME PLATE (VT660) 24L49441 1 VT660 Series


403 NAME PLATE (VT560) 24L49461 1 VT560 Series
403 NAME PLATE (VT460) 24L49481 1 VT460 Series
Make the label top face the set front.

SERIAL LABEL 16761791 1

101 201 Make the label top


face the set top.

NEC

301 403 402 401


Make the label top Make the label top Make the label top Make the label top
face the set top. face the set front. face the set front. face the filter.

9-18
PACKAGING
1. VT660
Packing procedures

Notes)1. Take out the soft case from the polyethylene bag and put the set, etc., in the soft case. Since then, put it in the original
polyethylene bag again. Fold back the bag and pack it.
2. The main body accommodated in the soft case shall be fastened with the soft case belt.
3. Put the dry battery cell in the polyethylene bag that is accommodated in the accessory set. After accommodation,
fasten the bag with an adhesive tape.
10-1
PACKAGING

2.VT660G
Packing procedures

Notes)1. Take out the soft case from the polyethylene bag and put the set, etc., in the soft case. Since then, put it in the original
polyethylene bag again. Fold back the bag and pack it.
2. The main body accommodated in the soft case shall be fastened with the soft case belt.
3. Put the dry battery cell in the polyethylene bag that is accommodated in the accessory set. After accommodation,
fasten the bag with an adhesive tape.
10-2
PACKAGING

3.VT560
Packing procedures

Notes)1. Take out the soft case from the polyethylene bag and put the set, etc., in the soft case. Since then, put it in the original
polyethylene bag again. Fold back the bag and pack it.
2. The main body accommodated in the soft case shall be fastened with the soft case belt.
3. Put the dry battery cell in the polyethylene bag that is accommodated in the accessory set. After accommodation,
fasten the bag with an adhesive tape.
10-3
PACKAGING

4. VT560G
Packing procedures

Notes)1. Take out the soft case from the polyethylene bag and put the set, etc., in the soft case. Since then, put it in the original
polyethylene bag again. Fold back the bag and pack it.
2. The main body accommodated in the soft case shall be fastened with the soft case belt.
3. Put the dry battery cell in the polyethylene bag that is accommodated in the accessory set. After accommodation,
fasten the bag with an adhesive tape.
10-4
PACKAGING

5. VT460
Packing procedures

Notes)1. Take out the soft case from the polyethylene bag and put the set, etc., in the soft case. Since then, put it in the original
polyethylene bag again. Fold back the bag and pack it.
2. The main body accommodated in the soft case shall be fastened with the soft case belt.
3. Put the dry battery cell in the polyethylene bag that is accommodated in the accessory set. After accommodation,
fasten the bag with an adhesive tape.
10-5
PACKAGING

6. VT460G
Packing procedures

Notes)1. Take out the soft case from the polyethylene bag and put the set, etc., in the soft case. Since then, put it in the original
polyethylene bag again. Fold back the bag and pack it.
2. The main body accommodated in the soft case shall be fastened with the soft case belt.
3. Put the dry battery cell in the polyethylene bag that is accommodated in the accessory set. After accommodation,
fasten the bag with an adhesive tape.
10-6
PACKAGING

7. VT660J
Packing procedures

Notes)1. Take out the soft case from the polyethylene bag and put the set, etc., in the soft case. Since then, put it in the original
polyethylene bag again. Fold back the bag and pack it.
2. The main body accommodated in the soft case shall be fastened with the soft case belt.
3. Put the dry battery cell in the polyethylene bag that is accommodated in the accessory set. After accommodation,
fasten the bag with an adhesive tape.
10-7
PACKAGING

8.VT460J
Packing procedures

Notes)1. Take out the soft case from the polyethylene bag and put the set, etc., in the soft case. Since then, put it in the original
polyethylene bag again. Fold back the bag and pack it.
2. The main body accommodated in the soft case shall be fastened with the soft case belt.
3. Put the dry battery cell in the polyethylene bag that is accommodated in the accessory set. After accommodation,
fasten the bag with an adhesive tape.
10-8
REPLACEMENT PART LIST
Notes:
1. Parts orders must contain model name, parts number and 4. Please note that the part, which is attached with an aster-
description. isk (*) at the head of its part number, is not in stock.
2. When you place an order for spare parts, please refer to Since this part is rarely used, it is not registered in some
the respective service manual and mention the right parts cases.
number on your P.O. Sheets. If the part is needed, it will be registered and kept in stock.
3. The components identitied by a mark or with the symbol
Nos. shaded are critical for safety. Replace only with parts
number specified.
The letters NSP in the table indicate non-service parts.

1. VT660
SYMBOL PART NO DESCRIPTION

*** PWB ASSYS ***


81G32F02 MAIN PWB ASSY

*** ELECTRICAL PARTS & MISCELLANEOUS PARTS ***


3N100371 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N100381 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N100391 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N170035 DC FAN TYF300J12
3N170036 DCFAN A33999-58NEC
3N170037 DCFAN D08A-12TG08A
3N670097 LCD L3P07X-45G00R
3N670098 LCD L3P07X-45G00G
3N670099 LCD L3P07X-45G00B
3N670107 LCD L3P07X-46G00R
3N670108 LCD L3P07X-46G00G
3N670109 LCD L3P07X-46G00B
3N810002 104JT-075-20206
6N300010 SPEAKER 40*40MM 4H 1W
7N530008 LAMP CABLE(CCT9402)L81,64
7N970022 THERMOSTATS (67L 120P)
7NW20019 CONNECTOR 2P L60
7NW3W023 CN 3P(CP1)220W,1015-22
7NW5W016 CONNECTOR 5P L170
7NWEW006 CONNECTOR 15P L150
82G32711 THERMOSTAT SASSY

*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***


* 16761791 SERIAL LABEL
* 18775141 LABEL,SERIAL MANUFACTURE
12JS2581 MIRROR 2(PB24)
12JS4491 RELAY LENS 1(PB39)
12JS4511 CONDENSER LENS-R(PB39)
12JS4521 CONDENSER LENS-G(PB39)
12JS4531 CONDENSER LENS-B(PB39)
12JS4541 DICHROIC MIRROR 1(PB39)
12JS4551 DICHROIC MIRROR 2(PB39)
12JS4561 UV CUT FILTER(PB39)
12JS4591 POLARIZER R(PB39)
12JS4601 POLARIZER G(PB39)

11-1
VT660
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
12JS4611 POLARIZER B(PB39)
12JS4621 ANALYZER R(PB39)
12JS4631 ANALYZER G(PB39)
12JS4641 ANALYZER B(PB39)
* 12JS5061 SUB FILTER R(PB39)
* 12JS5071 SUB FILTER G(PB39)
* 12JS5081 SUB FILTER B(PB39)
* 24C02841 CABLE CLIP(FCA-10)
* 24C03431 SPACER(H=10)
24DT8821 TOP COVER ASSY (VT660)
24DT8851 BOTTOM COVER ASSY(VT660)
* 24F36891 SEPARATE BASE(B39)
* 24F36901 COVER A
* 24F36911 COVER B
* 24F36921 COVER(OPT)
* 24F36932 HOLDER(FL)
* 24F36941 HOLDER(RL2)
* 24F36951 HOLDER(POLG)
* 24F36961 HOLDER(M1)
* 24F36971 DUCT A
* 24F37021 OPTBASE
* 24F37031 HOLDER(LAMP)
* 24F37041 COVER(LAMP)
* 24F37071 HOLDER(ANL)
24F37301 LAMP COVER
* 24F37311 HOLDER(FILTER)
* 24F37321 FILTER(REMOTE)
* 24F37331 INDICATOR A
* 24F37341 INDICATOR B
* 24F37351 FOOT F
* 24F37361 HOLDER(FOOT F)
* 24F37821 BARRIER(BASE)
24F38091 LENS CAP(PB39)
24FT8771 LAMP COVER ASSY (VT660)
24FT8781 HOLDER(FILTER)ASSY
24FT8881 DUCT A ASSY
24G08021 BUTTON(MENU)
24G08031 BUTTON(POWER)
24G08051 BUTTON(FOOT F)
* 24H43951 BRACKET(FL)
* 24H43961 BRACKET(RL2)
* 24H43971 BRACKET(IT1)
* 24H43981 BRACKET(IT2)
24H43991 SPRING(B39)
* 24H44001 BRACKET(PBS)
* 24H44011 PLATE(LCD)
* 24H44021 PLATE T(XDP)
* 24H44031 PLATE B(XDP)
* 24H44041 PLATE (LAMP)
* 24H44051 SHIELD(HOLDER)
* 24H44061 SHIELD(COVER)
* 24H44071 SHIELD(LAMP)
* 24H44091 PLATE(ANL)

11-2
VT660
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
* 24H44271 SPRING(FOOT F)
* 24H44282 BRACKET(I/O)
* 24H44301 BRACKET(SP)
* 24H44311 SHIELD(POWER)
* 24H44321 SHIELD(PS/BS)
* 24H44341 GUARD(FAN)
* 24H44751 SHIELDING PLATE(LAMP)
* 24H44761 SHIELD(BS)
* 24H44771 GUARD(BS)
* 24H46691 PLATE(K)
* 24H46701 BRACKET(TOP HOLD)
* 24H46711 PLATE UV
* 24H46871 SHIELD(IT)
* 24H46881 FIN(B)
* 24HS3382 BRACKET(I/O)ASSY
* 24J20761 CUSHION(ZOOM)H
* 24J20771 CUSHION(ZOOM)V
* 24J20781 CUSHION(FOOT F)
* 24J20791 CUSHION(FOOT R)
* 24J20801 FILTER(SIDE)
* 24J20811 CUSHION(SP)A
* 24J20821 BARRIER(POWER)
* 24J20841 BARRIER(BS)
* 24J21461 CUSHION(SP)B
* 24J21471 CUSHION(F15)
* 24J21481 CUSHION A
* 24J21491 CUSHION(L)
* 24J21501 CUSHION(I)
* 24J21511 CUSHION(FAN)
* 24J21541 BARRIER(DC/BS)
* 24J21612 BARRIER(I/O)A
* 24J21751 CUSHION(I/O)B
* 24J21771 BARRIER(LAMP)
* 24J21841 CUSHION(F2)
* 24J21851 SHEET(A)
* 24J21861 SHEET(B)
* 24J21881 CUSHION(LED)
* 24J21901 TAPE(6*6*T0.23)
* 24J21911 CUSHION(I/O)C
* 24J21921 TAPE(7*4*T0.23)
* 24J22151 CUSHION(ANL)
* 24J22161 BARRIER(LAMP)
* 24J22171 BARRIER(FAN)
* 24J22181 BARRIER(DUCT)
* 24JS1612 BARRIER(I/O)ASSY
* 24K25451 DECORATED PLATE(I/O)
* 24K25471 FILTER(REMOTE)R
24L49441 NAME PLATE(VT660)
24L49521 CAUTION LABEL(LAMP)
24L50001 CAUTION LABEL(FILTER)
24L50011 CAUTION LABEL(LAMP COVER)
24L50021 CAUTION LABEL(LENZ4)
24L50191 CAUTION LABEL(SERVICE)
7N970019 EARTH PLATE(VTX60)

11-3
VT660
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
OPT 82G32111 OPTBASE(MLA LRL) SASSY
OPT 82G32131 OPTBASE(MLA RLR) SASSY
82G32211 IT1 SASSY
82G32221 IT2 SASSY
82G32231 PBS SASSY
82G32261 M1 SASSY
82G32271 POL G SASSY
82G32311 FIELD LENS SASSY
82G32321 RELAY LENS 2 SASSY
82G32691 BOTTOM SASSY
83G321A1 ENGINE ASSY (SERVICE VT660)
SRW109 91052036 SCREW,CFIMS*2*6*3KF
SRW110 91112013 SCREW,CBIMS*2*4*15KF
SRW090 91613061 SCREW,#2CBTS*3*10*15BF
SRW002 91613061 SCREW,#2CBTS*3*10*15BF
SRW020 91613061 SCREW,#2CBTS*3*10*15BF
91663053 SCREW,#2CBRTS*3*8*15KF
SRW070 91663053 SCREW,#2CBRTS*3*8*15KF
SRW061 25851411 SCREW,CBIPS*3*10*15KF
SRW112 25851411 SCREW,CBIPS*3*10*15KF
SRW105 25851411 SCREW,CBIPS*3*10*15KF
SRW113 12851741 SPECIAL SCREW(PL-HM2.5*6)
SRW114 12851741 SPECIAL SCREW(PL-HM2.5*6)
SRW106 12851741 SPECIAL SCREW(PL-HM2.5*6)
SRW107 24N05751 CBIPS*2*4*15KF
24N05831 STUD(D-SUB)
24N06001 PUSHNUT(3.0)
24N06171 SPECIAL SCREW(M3*8.9)(SUS
SRW080 24N06201 STUD(M3/M2.5*H8.8)
SRW108 24N06221 PL-HHCS*3*10*15BF
SRW116 24N06361 SPECIAL SCREW(M3*4)
SRW117 24N06371 SPECIAL NUT(M4*H3.2)
SRW118 24N06381 SPECIAL WASHER(LWA*4)
SRW111 24N06521 CBIPS*2*5*15KF
9101311L CPIMS*3*20*3GF
SRW030 910D2533 SL-CPIMS*2.5*6*15KF
SRW060 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW081 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW082 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW083 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW102 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW103 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW104 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW003 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW004 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW005 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW006 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW010 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW011 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW012 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW013 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW014 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW031 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW032 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW103 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW101 910E2531 SCREW CPIMS*2.5*10*15BF
SRW001 910E3141 SCREW,PL-CPIMS*3*32*15BF
11-4
VT660
*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***
24N06281 SCREW(HANDLE M4)
68151006 ALKALINE BATTERY LR6(JE)
24C07231 DRIVER(M4)
24M18361 PROTECTION BAG(SCREW)
7N520013 CABLE USB (A-B) 1.8M SI
7N8P2431 VT60 QUICK GUIDE(U/G)
7N8P2451 VT60 LW&FCC SHEERT
7N950141 VT60 CD-ROM(U/M)
7N900381 REM-T HAND UNIT RD-394E
7N8P2441 VT60 IMPORTANT INFO(U/G)
7N8P1351 REGISTRATIOM CARD(USA)
7N080206 POWER CODE U2 L3.0 7.0A K
24L49501 LABEL(INSTA CARE)
24F38031 HANDLE
24BS7201 SOFT CASE(VT660)
24M16171 PROTECTION BOX
24MU7971 SPACER(L)(VT660)
24MU7981 SPACER(R)(VT660)
24MU7991 PARTS BOX (VT660)
24MU8001 CARTON BOX (VT660U)

*** ACCESSORIES(LT260) ***


7N520012 CABLE RGB, MD15P L1.8
24C05051 STRAP
24C04531 PUSH RIVET

Product number Product name

*** OPTION ***


01161072 VT60LP(replacement lamp)
01957616 VL-CA10MD
01957617 VL-CA02MD
01161013 VL-CA03V
01161042 CA03D
01161051 ADP-CV1
01161050 ADP-DT1

OPTION : When you need P/O the OPTION PARTS.


Please contact to Sales Department.

11-5
VT560
2. VT560
SYMBOL PART NO DESCRIPTION

*** PWB ASSYS ***


81G32F02 MAIN PWB ASSY

*** ELECTRICAL PARTS & MISCELLANEOUS PARTS ***


3N100371 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N100381 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N100391 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N170035 DC FAN TYF300J12
3N170036 DCFAN A33999-58NEC
3N170037 DCFAN D08A-12TG08A
3N670094 LCD L3P07X-41G00R
3N670096 LCD L3P07X-41G00B
3N670105 LCD L3P07X-42G00G
3N670095 LCD L3P07X-41G00G
3N670104 LCD L3P07X-42G00R
3N670106 LCD L3P07X-42G00B
3N810002 104JT-075-20206
6N300010 SPEAKER 40*40MM 4H 1W
7N530008 LAMP CABLE(CCT9402)L81,64
7N970022 THERMOSTATS (67L 120P)
7NW20019 CONNECTOR 2P L60
7NW3W023 CN 3P(CP1)220W,1015-22
7NW5W016 CONNECTOR 5P L170
7NWEW006 CONNECTOR 15P L150
82G32711 THERMOSTAT SASSY

*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***


* 16761791 SERIAL LABEL
* 18775141 LABEL,SERIAL MANUFACTURE
12JS2581 MIRROR 2(PB24)
12JS4491 RELAY LENS 1(PB39)
12JS4511 CONDENSER LENS-R(PB39)
12JS4521 CONDENSER LENS-G(PB39)
12JS4531 CONDENSER LENS-B(PB39)
12JS4541 DICHROIC MIRROR 1(PB39)
12JS4551 DICHROIC MIRROR 2(PB39)
12JS4561 UV CUT FILTER(PB39)
12JS4591 POLARIZER R(PB39)
12JS4601 POLARIZER G(PB39)
12JS4611 POLARIZER B(PB39)
12JS4621 ANALYZER R(PB39)
12JS4631 ANALYZER G(PB39)
12JS4641 ANALYZER B(PB39)
* 12JS5061 SUB FILTER R(PB39)
* 12JS5071 SUB FILTER G(PB39)
* 12JS5081 SUB FILTER B(PB39)
* 24C02841 CABLE CLIP(FCA-10)
* 24C03431 SPACER(H=10)
24DT8831 TOP COVER ASSY (VT560)
24DT8851 BOTTOM COVER ASSY(VT660)
* 24F36891 SEPARATE BASE(B39)
* 24F36901 COVER A

11-6
VT560
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
* 24F36911 COVER B
* 24F36921 COVER(OPT)
* 24F36932 HOLDER(FL)
* 24F36941 HOLDER(RL2)
* 24F36951 HOLDER(POLG)
* 24F36961 HOLDER(M1)
* 24F36971 DUCT A
* 24F37021 OPTBASE
* 24F37031 HOLDER(LAMP)
* 24F37041 COVER(LAMP)
* 24F37071 HOLDER(ANL)
24F37301 LAMP COVER
* 24F37311 HOLDER(FILTER)
* 24F37321 FILTER(REMOTE)
* 24F37331 INDICATOR A
* 24F37341 INDICATOR B
* 24F37351 FOOT F
* 24F37361 HOLDER(FOOT F)
* 24F37821 BARRIER(BASE)
24F38091 LENS CAP(PB39)
24FT8771 LAMP COVER ASSY (VT660)
24FT8781 HOLDER(FILTER)ASSY
24FT8881 DUCT A ASSY
24G08021 BUTTON(MENU)
24G08031 BUTTON(POWER)
24G08051 BUTTON(FOOT F)
* 24H43951 BRACKET(FL)
* 24H43961 BRACKET(RL2)
* 24H43971 BRACKET(IT1)
* 24H43981 BRACKET(IT2)
24H43991 SPRING(B39)
* 24H44001 BRACKET(PBS)
* 24H44011 PLATE(LCD)
* 24H44021 PLATE T(XDP)
* 24H44031 PLATE B(XDP)
* 24H44041 PLATE (LAMP)
* 24H44051 SHIELD(HOLDER)
* 24H44061 SHIELD(COVER)
* 24H44071 SHIELD(LAMP)
* 24H44091 PLATE(ANL)
* 24H44271 SPRING(FOOT F)
* 24H44282 BRACKET(I/O)
* 24H44301 BRACKET(SP)
* 24H44311 SHIELD(POWER)
* 24H44321 SHIELD(PS/BS)
* 24H44341 GUARD(FAN)
* 24H44751 SHIELDING PLATE(LAMP)
* 24H44761 SHIELD(BS)
* 24H44771 GUARD(BS)
* 24H46691 PLATE(K)
* 24H46701 BRACKET(TOP HOLD)
* 24H46711 PLATE UV
* 24H46871 SHIELD(IT)
* 24H46881 FIN(B)

11-7
VT560
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
* 24HS3382 BRACKET(I/O)ASSY
* 24J20761 CUSHION(ZOOM)H
* 24J20771 CUSHION(ZOOM)V
* 24J20781 CUSHION(FOOT F)
* 24J20791 CUSHION(FOOT R)
* 24J20801 FILTER(SIDE)
* 24J20811 CUSHION(SP)A
* 24J20821 BARRIER(POWER)
* 24J20841 BARRIER(BS)
* 24J21461 CUSHION(SP)B
* 24J21471 CUSHION(F15)
* 24J21481 CUSHION A
* 24J21491 CUSHION(L)
* 24J21501 CUSHION(I)
* 24J21511 CUSHION(FAN)
* 24J21541 BARRIER(DC/BS)
* 24J21612 BARRIER(I/O)A
* 24J21751 CUSHION(I/O)B
* 24J21771 BARRIER(LAMP)
* 24J21841 CUSHION(F2)
* 24J21851 SHEET(A)
* 24J21861 SHEET(B)
* 24J21881 CUSHION(LED)
* 24J21901 TAPE(6*6*T0.23)
* 24J21911 CUSHION(I/O)C
* 24J21921 TAPE(7*4*T0.23)
* 24J22151 CUSHION(ANL)
* 24J22161 BARRIER(LAMP)
* 24J22171 BARRIER(FAN)
* 24J22181 BARRIER(DUCT)
* 24JS1612 BARRIER(I/O)ASSY
* 24K25451 DECORATED PLATE(I/O)
* 24K25471 FILTER(REMOTE)R
24L49461 NAME PLATE(VT560)
24L49521 CAUTION LABEL(LAMP)
24L50001 CAUTION LABEL(FILTER)
24L50011 CAUTION LABEL(LAMP COVER)
24L50021 CAUTION LABEL(LENZ4)
24L50191 CAUTION LABEL(SERVICE)
7N970019 EARTH PLATE(VTX60)
OPT 82G29111 OPTBASE(X LRL) SASSY
OPT 82G29131 OPTBASE(X RLR) SASSY
82G32211 IT1 SASSY
82G32221 IT2 SASSY
82G32231 PBS SASSY
82G32261 M1 SASSY
82G32271 POL G SASSY
82G32311 FIELD LENS SASSY
82G32321 RELAY LENS 2 SASSY
82G32691 BOTTOM SASSY
83G291A1 ENGINE ASSY (SERVICE VT560)
SRW109 91052036 SCREW,CFIMS*2*6*3KF
SRW110 91112013 SCREW,CBIMS*2*4*15KF
SRW090 91613061 SCREW,#2CBTS*3*10*15BF
SRW002 91613061 SCREW,#2CBTS*3*10*15BF
SRW020 91613061 SCREW,#2CBTS*3*10*15BF
11-8
VT560
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
91663053 SCREW,#2CBRTS*3*8*15KF
SRW070 91663053 SCREW,#2CBRTS*3*8*15KF
SRW061 25851411 SCREW,CBIPS*3*10*15KF
SRW112 25851411 SCREW,CBIPS*3*10*15KF
SRW105 25851411 SCREW,CBIPS*3*10*15KF
SRW113 12851741 SPECIAL SCREW(PL-HM2.5*6)
SRW114 12851741 SPECIAL SCREW(PL-HM2.5*6)
SRW106 12851741 SPECIAL SCREW(PL-HM2.5*6)
SRW107 24N05751 CBIPS*2*4*15KF
24N05831 STUD(D-SUB)
24N06001 PUSHNUT(3.0)
24N06171 SPECIAL SCREW(M3*8.9)(SUS
SRW080 24N06201 STUD(M3/M2.5*H8.8)
SRW108 24N06221 PL-HHCS*3*10*15BF
SRW116 24N06361 SPECIAL SCREW(M3*4)
SRW117 24N06371 SPECIAL NUT(M4*H3.2)
SRW118 24N06381 SPECIAL WASHER(LWA*4)
SRW111 24N06521 CBIPS*2*5*15KF
9101311L CPIMS*3*20*3GF
SRW030 910D2533 SL-CPIMS*2.5*6*15KF
SRW060 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW081 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW082 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW083 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW102 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW103 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW104 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW003 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW004 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW005 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW006 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW010 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW011 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW012 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW013 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW014 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW031 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW032 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW103 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW101 910E2531 SCREW CPIMS*2.5*10*15BF
SRW001 910E3141 SCREW,PL-CPIMS*3*32*15BF

*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***


24N06281 SCREW(HANDLE M4)
68151006 ALKALINE BATTERY LR6(JE)
24C07231 DRIVER(M4)
24M18361 PROTECTION BAG(SCREW)
7N520013 CABLE USB (A-B) 1.8M SI
7N8P2431 VT60 QUICK GUIDE(U/G)
7N8P2451 VT60 LW&FCC SHEERT
7N950141 VT60 CD-ROM(U/M)
7N900381 REM-T HAND UNIT RD-394E
7N8P2441 VT60 IMPORTANT INFO(U/G)

11-9
VT560
*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***
7N8P1351 REGISTRATIOM CARD(USA)
7N080206 POWER CODE U2 L3.0 7.0A K
24L49501 LABEL(INSTA CARE)
24F38031 HANDLE
24BS7201 SOFT CASE(VT660)
24M16171 PROTECTION BOX
24MU7971 SPACER(L)(VT660)
24MU7981 SPACER(R)(VT660)
24MU7991 PARTS BOX (VT660)
24MU8041 CARTON BOX (VT560U)

*** ACCESSORIES(LT260) ***


7N520012 CABLE RGB, MD15P L1.8
24C05051 STRAP
24C04531 PUSH RIVET

Product number Product name

*** OPTION ***


01161072 VT60LP(replacement lamp)
01957616 VL-CA10MD
01957617 VL-CA02MD
01161013 VL-CA03V
01161042 CA03D
01161051 ADP-CV1
01161050 ADP-DT1

OPTION : When you need P/O the OPTION PARTS.


Please contact to Sales Department.

11-10
VT460
3. VT460
SYMBOL PART NO DESCRIPTION

*** PWB ASSYS ***


81G26F01 MAIN PWB ASSY

*** ELECTRICAL PARTS & MISCELLANEOUS PARTS ***


3N100371 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N100381 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N100391 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N170035 DC FAN TYF300J12
3N170036 DCFAN A33999-58NEC
3N170037 DCFAN D08A-12TG08A
3N670112 LCD LCX034CNB-8(R/G)
3N670121 LCD LCX034CPB-7(L/R)
3N670123 LCD LCX034CPB-6(L/B)
3N670111 LCD LCX034CNB-7(R/R)
3N670113 LCD LCX034CNB-6(R/B)
3N670122 LCD LCX034CPB-8(L/G)
3N810002 104JT-075-20206
6N300010 SPEAKER 40*40MM 4H 1W
7N530008 LAMP CABLE(CCT9402)L81,64
7N970022 THERMOSTATS (67L 120P)
7NW20019 CONNECTOR 2P L60
7NW3W023 CN 3P(CP1)220W,1015-22
7NW5W016 CONNECTOR 5P L170
7NWEW006 CONNECTOR 15P L150
82G32711 THERMOSTAT SASSY

*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***


* 16761791 SERIAL LABEL
* 18775141 LABEL,SERIAL MANUFACTURE
12JS2581 MIRROR 2(PB24)
12JS4491 RELAY LENS 1(PB39)
12JS4511 CONDENSER LENS-R(PB39)
12JS4521 CONDENSER LENS-G(PB39)
12JS4531 CONDENSER LENS-B(PB39)
12JS4541 DICHROIC MIRROR 1(PB39)
12JS4551 DICHROIC MIRROR 2(PB39)
12JS4561 UV CUT FILTER(PB39)
12JS4591 POLARIZER R(PB39)
12JS4601 POLARIZER G(PB39)
12JS4611 POLARIZER B(PB39)
12JS4621 ANALYZER R(PB39)
12JS4631 ANALYZER G(PB39)
12JS4641 ANALYZER B(PB39)
* 12JS5061 SUB FILTER R(PB39)
* 12JS5071 SUB FILTER G(PB39)
* 12JS5081 SUB FILTER B(PB39)
* 24C02841 CABLE CLIP(FCA-10)
* 24C03431 SPACER(H=10)
24DT8841 TOP COVER ASSY (VT460)
24DT8851 BOTTOM COVER ASSY(VT660)
* 24F36891 SEPARATE BASE(B39)
* 24F36901 COVER A

11-11
VT460
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
* 24F36911 COVER B
* 24F36921 COVER(OPT)
* 24F36932 HOLDER(FL)
* 24F36941 HOLDER(RL2)
* 24F36951 HOLDER(POLG)
* 24F36961 HOLDER(M1)
* 24F36971 DUCT A
* 24F37021 OPTBASE
* 24F37031 HOLDER(LAMP)
* 24F37041 COVER(LAMP)
* 24F37071 HOLDER(ANL)
24F37301 LAMP COVER
* 24F37311 HOLDER(FILTER)
* 24F37321 FILTER(REMOTE)
* 24F37331 INDICATOR A
* 24F37341 INDICATOR B
* 24F37351 FOOT F
* 24F37361 HOLDER(FOOT F)
* 24F37821 BARRIER(BASE)
24F38091 LENS CAP(PB39)
24FT8771 LAMP COVER ASSY (VT660)
24FT8781 HOLDER(FILTER)ASSY
24FT8881 DUCT A ASSY
24G08021 BUTTON(MENU)
24G08031 BUTTON(POWER)
24G08051 BUTTON(FOOT F)
* 24H43951 BRACKET(FL)
* 24H43961 BRACKET(RL2)
* 24H43971 BRACKET(IT1)
* 24H43981 BRACKET(IT2)
24H43991 SPRING(B39)
* 24H44001 BRACKET(PBS)
* 24H45731 PLATE(S)
* 24H44021 PLATE T(XDP)
* 24H44031 PLATE B(XDP)
* 24H44041 PLATE (LAMP)
* 24H44051 SHIELD(HOLDER)
* 24H44061 SHIELD(COVER)
* 24H44071 SHIELD(LAMP)
* 24H44091 PLATE(ANL)
* 24H44271 SPRING(FOOT F)
* 24H44282 BRACKET(I/O)
* 24H44301 BRACKET(SP)
* 24H44311 SHIELD(POWER)
* 24H44321 SHIELD(PS/BS)
* 24H44341 GUARD(FAN)
* 24H44751 SHIELDING PLATE(LAMP)
* 24H44761 SHIELD(BS)
* 24H44771 GUARD(BS)
* 24H46691 PLATE(K)
* 24H46701 BRACKET(TOP HOLD)
* 24H46711 PLATE UV
* 24H46871 SHIELD(IT)
* 24H46881 FIN(B)

11-12
VT460
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
* 24HS3382 BRACKET(I/O)ASSY
* 24J20761 CUSHION(ZOOM)H
* 24J20771 CUSHION(ZOOM)V
* 24J20781 CUSHION(FOOT F)
* 24J20791 CUSHION(FOOT R)
* 24J20801 FILTER(SIDE)
* 24J20811 CUSHION(SP)A
* 24J20821 BARRIER(POWER)
* 24J20841 BARRIER(BS)
* 24J21461 CUSHION(SP)B
* 24J21471 CUSHION(F15)
* 24J21481 CUSHION A
* 24J21491 CUSHION(L)
* 24J21501 CUSHION(I)
* 24J21511 CUSHION(FAN)
* 24J21541 BARRIER(DC/BS)
* 24J21612 BARRIER(I/O)A
* 24J21751 CUSHION(I/O)B
* 24J21771 BARRIER(LAMP)
* 24J21841 CUSHION(F2)
* 24J21851 SHEET(A)
* 24J21861 SHEET(B)
* 24J21881 CUSHION(LED)
* 24J21901 TAPE(6*6*T0.23)
* 24J21911 CUSHION(I/O)C
* 24J21921 TAPE(7*4*T0.23)
* 24J22151 CUSHION(ANL)
* 24J22161 BARRIER(LAMP)
* 24J22171 BARRIER(FAN)
* 24J22181 BARRIER(DUCT)
* 24JS1612 BARRIER(I/O)ASSY
* 24K25451 DECORATED PLATE(I/O)
* 24K25471 FILTER(REMOTE)R
24L49481 NAME PLATE(VT460)
24L49521 CAUTION LABEL(LAMP)
24L50001 CAUTION LABEL(FILTER)
24L50011 CAUTION LABEL(LAMP COVER)
24L50021 CAUTION LABEL(LENZ4)
24L50191 CAUTION LABEL(SERVICE)
7N970019 EARTH PLATE(VTX60)
OPT 82G26111 OPTBASE(S LRL) SASSY
OPT 82G26131 OPTBASE(S RLR) SASSY
82G32211 IT1 SASSY
82G32221 IT2 SASSY
82G32231 PBS SASSY
82G32261 M1 SASSY
82G32271 POL G SASSY
82G32311 FIELD LENS SASSY
82G32321 RELAY LENS 2 SASSY
82G32691 BOTTOM SASSY
83G261A1 ENGINE ASSY (SERVICE VT460)
SRW109 91051033 CFIMS*1.7*6*15KF
SRW110 91112013 SCREW,CBIMS*2*4*15KF
SRW090 91613061 SCREW,#2CBTS*3*10*15BF
SRW002 91613061 SCREW,#2CBTS*3*10*15BF
SRW020 91613061 SCREW,#2CBTS*3*10*15BF
11-13
VT460
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
91663053 SCREW,#2CBRTS*3*8*15KF
SRW070 91663053 SCREW,#2CBRTS*3*8*15KF
SRW061 25851411 SCREW,CBIPS*3*10*15KF
SRW112 25851411 SCREW,CBIPS*3*10*15KF
SRW105 25851411 SCREW,CBIPS*3*10*15KF
SRW113 12851741 SPECIAL SCREW(PL-HM2.5*6)
SRW114 12851741 SPECIAL SCREW(PL-HM2.5*6)
SRW106 12851741 SPECIAL SCREW(PL-HM2.5*6)
SRW107 24N05751 CBIPS*2*4*15KF
24N05831 STUD(D-SUB)
24N06001 PUSHNUT(3.0)
24N06171 SPECIAL SCREW(M3*8.9)(SUS
SRW080 24N06201 STUD(M3/M2.5*H8.8)
SRW108 24N06221 PL-HHCS*3*10*15BF
SRW116 24N06361 SPECIAL SCREW(M3*4)
SRW117 24N06371 SPECIAL NUT(M4*H3.2)
SRW118 24N06381 SPECIAL WASHER(LWA*4)
SRW111 24N06521 CBIPS*2*5*15KF
9101311L CPIMS*3*20*3GF
SRW030 910D2533 SL-CPIMS*2.5*6*15KF
SRW060 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW081 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW082 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW083 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW102 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW103 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW104 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW003 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW004 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW005 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW006 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW010 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW011 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW012 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW013 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW014 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW031 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW032 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW103 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW101 910E2531 SCREW CPIMS*2.5*10*15BF
SRW001 910E3141 SCREW,PL-CPIMS*3*32*15BF

*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***


24N06281 SCREW(HANDLE M4)
68151006 ALKALINE BATTERY LR6(JE)
24C07231 DRIVER(M4)
24M18361 PROTECTION BAG(SCREW)
7N520013 CABLE USB (A-B) 1.8M SI
7N8P2431 VT60 QUICK GUIDE(U/G)
7N8P2451 VT60 LW&FCC SHEERT
7N950141 VT60 CD-ROM(U/M)
7N900381 REM-T HAND UNIT RD-394E
7N8P2441 VT60 IMPORTANT INFO(U/G)

11-14
VT460
*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***
7N8P1351 REGISTRATIOM CARD(USA)
7N080206 POWER CODE U2 L3.0 7.0A K
24L49501 LABEL(INSTA CARE)
24F38031 HANDLE
24BS7201 SOFT CASE(VT660)
24M16171 PROTECTION BOX
24MU7971 SPACER(L)(VT660)
24MU7981 SPACER(R)(VT660)
24MU7991 PARTS BOX (VT660)
24MU8081 CARTON BOX (VT460U)

*** ACCESSORIES(LT260) ***


7N520012 CABLE RGB, MD15P L1.8
24C05051 STRAP
24C04531 PUSH RIVET

Product number Product name

*** OPTION ***


01161072 VT60LP(replacement lamp)
01957616 VL-CA10MD
01957617 VL-CA02MD
01161013 VL-CA03V
01161042 CA03D
01161051 ADP-CV1
01161050 ADP-DT1

OPTION : When you need P/O the OPTION PARTS.


Please contact to Sales Department.

11-15
VT660G
4. VT660G
SYMBOL PART NO DESCRIPTION

*** PWB ASSYS ***


81G32F02 MAIN PWB ASSY

*** ELECTRICAL PARTS & MISCELLANEOUS PARTS ***


3N100371 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N100381 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N100391 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N170035 DC FAN TYF300J12
3N170036 DCFAN A33999-58NEC
3N170037 DCFAN D08A-12TG08A
3N670097 LCD L3P07X-45G00R
3N670098 LCD L3P07X-45G00G
3N670099 LCD L3P07X-45G00B
3N670107 LCD L3P07X-46G00R
3N670108 LCD L3P07X-46G00G
3N670109 LCD L3P07X-46G00B
3N810002 104JT-075-20206
6N300010 SPEAKER 40*40MM 4H 1W
7N530008 LAMP CABLE(CCT9402)L81,64
7N970022 THERMOSTATS (67L 120P)
7NW20019 CONNECTOR 2P L60
7NW3W023 CN 3P(CP1)220W,1015-22
7NW5W016 CONNECTOR 5P L170
7NWEW006 CONNECTOR 15P L150
82G32711 THERMOSTAT SASSY

*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***


* 16761791 SERIAL LABEL
* 18775141 LABEL,SERIAL MANUFACTURE
12JS2581 MIRROR 2(PB24)
12JS4491 RELAY LENS 1(PB39)
12JS4511 CONDENSER LENS-R(PB39)
12JS4521 CONDENSER LENS-G(PB39)
12JS4531 CONDENSER LENS-B(PB39)
12JS4541 DICHROIC MIRROR 1(PB39)
12JS4551 DICHROIC MIRROR 2(PB39)
12JS4561 UV CUT FILTER(PB39)
12JS4591 POLARIZER R(PB39)
12JS4601 POLARIZER G(PB39)
12JS4611 POLARIZER B(PB39)
12JS4621 ANALYZER R(PB39)
12JS4631 ANALYZER G(PB39)
12JS4641 ANALYZER B(PB39)
* 12JS5061 SUB FILTER R(PB39)
* 12JS5071 SUB FILTER G(PB39)
* 12JS5081 SUB FILTER B(PB39)
* 24C02841 CABLE CLIP(FCA-10)
* 24C03431 SPACER(H=10)
24DT8821 TOP COVER ASSY (VT660)
24DT8851 BOTTOM COVER ASSY(VT660)
* 24F36891 SEPARATE BASE(B39)
* 24F36901 COVER A

11-16
VT660G
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
* 24F36911 COVER B
* 24F36921 COVER(OPT)
* 24F36932 HOLDER(FL)
* 24F36941 HOLDER(RL2)
* 24F36951 HOLDER(POLG)
* 24F36961 HOLDER(M1)
* 24F36971 DUCT A
* 24F37021 OPTBASE
* 24F37031 HOLDER(LAMP)
* 24F37041 COVER(LAMP)
* 24F37071 HOLDER(ANL)
24F37301 LAMP COVER
* 24F37311 HOLDER(FILTER)
* 24F37321 FILTER(REMOTE)
* 24F37331 INDICATOR A
* 24F37341 INDICATOR B
* 24F37351 FOOT F
* 24F37361 HOLDER(FOOT F)
* 24F37821 BARRIER(BASE)
24F38091 LENS CAP(PB39)
24FT8771 LAMP COVER ASSY (VT660)
24FT8781 HOLDER(FILTER)ASSY
24FT8881 DUCT A ASSY
24G08021 BUTTON(MENU)
24G08031 BUTTON(POWER)
24G08051 BUTTON(FOOT F)
* 24H43951 BRACKET(FL)
* 24H43961 BRACKET(RL2)
* 24H43971 BRACKET(IT1)
* 24H43981 BRACKET(IT2)
24H43991 SPRING(B39)
* 24H44001 BRACKET(PBS)
* 24H44011 PLATE(LCD)
* 24H44021 PLATE T(XDP)
* 24H44031 PLATE B(XDP)
* 24H44041 PLATE (LAMP)
* 24H44051 SHIELD(HOLDER)
* 24H44061 SHIELD(COVER)
* 24H44071 SHIELD(LAMP)
* 24H44091 PLATE(ANL)
* 24H44271 SPRING(FOOT F)
* 24H44282 BRACKET(I/O)
* 24H44301 BRACKET(SP)
* 24H44311 SHIELD(POWER)
* 24H44321 SHIELD(PS/BS)
* 24H44341 GUARD(FAN)
* 24H44751 SHIELDING PLATE(LAMP)
* 24H44761 SHIELD(BS)
* 24H44771 GUARD(BS)
* 24H46691 PLATE(K)
* 24H46701 BRACKET(TOP HOLD)
* 24H46711 PLATE UV
* 24H46871 SHIELD(IT)
* 24H46881 FIN(B)

11-17
VT660G
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
* 24HS3382 BRACKET(I/O)ASSY
* 24J20761 CUSHION(ZOOM)H
* 24J20771 CUSHION(ZOOM)V
* 24J20781 CUSHION(FOOT F)
* 24J20791 CUSHION(FOOT R)
* 24J20801 FILTER(SIDE)
* 24J20811 CUSHION(SP)A
* 24J20821 BARRIER(POWER)
* 24J20841 BARRIER(BS)
* 24J21461 CUSHION(SP)B
* 24J21471 CUSHION(F15)
* 24J21481 CUSHION A
* 24J21491 CUSHION(L)
* 24J21501 CUSHION(I)
* 24J21511 CUSHION(FAN)
* 24J21541 BARRIER(DC/BS)
* 24J21612 BARRIER(I/O)A
* 24J21751 CUSHION(I/O)B
* 24J21771 BARRIER(LAMP)
* 24J21841 CUSHION(F2)
* 24J21851 SHEET(A)
* 24J21861 SHEET(B)
* 24J21881 CUSHION(LED)
* 24J21901 TAPE(6*6*T0.23)
* 24J21911 CUSHION(I/O)C
* 24J21921 TAPE(7*4*T0.23)
* 24J22151 CUSHION(ANL)
* 24J22161 BARRIER(LAMP)
* 24J22171 BARRIER(FAN)
* 24J22181 BARRIER(DUCT)
* 24JS1612 BARRIER(I/O)ASSY
* 24K25451 DECORATED PLATE(I/O)
* 24K25471 FILTER(REMOTE)R
24L49441 NAME PLATE(VT660)
24L49521 CAUTION LABEL(LAMP)
24L50001 CAUTION LABEL(FILTER)
24L50011 CAUTION LABEL(LAMP COVER)
24L50021 CAUTION LABEL(LENZ4)
24L50191 CAUTION LABEL(SERVICE)
7N970019 EARTH PLATE(VTX60)
OPT 82G32111 OPTBASE(MLA LRL) SASSY
OPT 82G32131 OPTBASE(MLA RLR) SASSY
82G32211 IT1 SASSY
82G32221 IT2 SASSY
82G32231 PBS SASSY
82G32261 M1 SASSY
82G32271 POL G SASSY
82G32311 FIELD LENS SASSY
82G32321 RELAY LENS 2 SASSY
82G32691 BOTTOM SASSY
83G321A1 ENGINE ASSY (SERVICE VT660)
SRW109 91052036 SCREW,CFIMS*2*6*3KF
SRW110 91112013 SCREW,CBIMS*2*4*15KF
SRW090 91613061 SCREW,#2CBTS*3*10*15BF
SRW002 91613061 SCREW,#2CBTS*3*10*15BF
SRW020 91613061 SCREW,#2CBTS*3*10*15BF
11-18
VT660G
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
91663053 SCREW,#2CBRTS*3*8*15KF
SRW070 91663053 SCREW,#2CBRTS*3*8*15KF
SRW061 25851411 SCREW,CBIPS*3*10*15KF
SRW112 25851411 SCREW,CBIPS*3*10*15KF
SRW105 25851411 SCREW,CBIPS*3*10*15KF
SRW113 12851741 SPECIAL SCREW(PL-HM2.5*6)
SRW114 12851741 SPECIAL SCREW(PL-HM2.5*6)
SRW106 12851741 SPECIAL SCREW(PL-HM2.5*6)
SRW107 24N05751 CBIPS*2*4*15KF
24N05831 STUD(D-SUB)
24N06001 PUSHNUT(3.0)
24N06171 SPECIAL SCREW(M3*8.9)(SUS
SRW080 24N06201 STUD(M3/M2.5*H8.8)
SRW108 24N06221 PL-HHCS*3*10*15BF
SRW116 24N06361 SPECIAL SCREW(M3*4)
SRW117 24N06371 SPECIAL NUT(M4*H3.2)
SRW118 24N06381 SPECIAL WASHER(LWA*4)
SRW111 24N06521 CBIPS*2*5*15KF
9101311L CPIMS*3*20*3GF
SRW030 910D2533 SL-CPIMS*2.5*6*15KF
SRW060 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW081 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW082 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW083 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW102 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW103 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW104 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW003 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW004 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW005 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW006 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW010 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW011 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW012 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW013 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW014 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW031 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW032 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW103 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW101 910E2531 SCREW CPIMS*2.5*10*15BF
SRW001 910E3141 SCREW,PL-CPIMS*3*32*15BF

*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***


24N06281 SCREW(HANDLE M4)
68151006 ALKALINE BATTERY LR6(JE)
24C07231 DRIVER(M4)
24M18361 PROTECTION BAG(SCREW)
7N520013 CABLE USB (A-B) 1.8M SI
7N8P2431 VT60 QUICK GUIDE(U/G)
7N8P1611 WARRANTY(EUROPE)
7N950141 VT60 CD-ROM(U/M)
7N900381 REM-T HAND UNIT RD-394E
7N8P2441 VT60 IMPORTANT INFO(U/G)

11-19
VT660G
*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***
7N080005 POW CODE E2 L3.0 2.5A K
24F38031 HANDLE
24BS7201 SOFT CASE(VT660)
24M16171 PROTECTION BOX
24MU7971 SPACER(L)(VT660)
24MU7981 SPACER(R)(VT660)
24MU7991 PARTS BOX (VT660)
24MU8011 CARTON BOX (VT660)

*** ACCESSORIES(LT260) ***


7N520012 CABLE RGB, MD15P L1.8
24C05051 STRAP
24C04531 PUSH RIVET

Product number Product name

*** OPTION ***


01161072 VT60LP(replacement lamp)
01957616 VL-CA10MD
01957617 VL-CA02MD
01161013 VL-CA03V
01161042 CA03D
01161051 ADP-CV1
01161050 ADP-DT1

OPTION : When you need P/O the OPTION PARTS.


Please contact to Sales Department.

11-20
VT560G
5. VT560G
SYMBOL PART NO DESCRIPTION

*** PWB ASSYS ***


81G32F02 MAIN PWB ASSY

*** ELECTRICAL PARTS & MISCELLANEOUS PARTS ***


3N100371 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N100381 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N100391 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N170035 DC FAN TYF300J12
3N170036 DCFAN A33999-58NEC
3N170037 DCFAN D08A-12TG08A
3N670094 LCD L3P07X-41G00R
3N670096 LCD L3P07X-41G00B
3N670105 LCD L3P07X-42G00G
3N670095 LCD L3P07X-41G00G
3N670104 LCD L3P07X-42G00R
3N670106 LCD L3P07X-42G00B
3N810002 104JT-075-20206
6N300010 SPEAKER 40*40MM 4H 1W
7N530008 LAMP CABLE(CCT9402)L81,64
7N970022 THERMOSTATS (67L 120P)
7NW20019 CONNECTOR 2P L60
7NW3W023 CN 3P(CP1)220W,1015-22
7NW5W016 CONNECTOR 5P L170
7NWEW006 CONNECTOR 15P L150
82G32711 THERMOSTAT SASSY

*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***


* 16761791 SERIAL LABEL
* 18775141 LABEL,SERIAL MANUFACTURE
12JS2581 MIRROR 2(PB24)
12JS4491 RELAY LENS 1(PB39)
12JS4511 CONDENSER LENS-R(PB39)
12JS4521 CONDENSER LENS-G(PB39)
12JS4531 CONDENSER LENS-B(PB39)
12JS4541 DICHROIC MIRROR 1(PB39)
12JS4551 DICHROIC MIRROR 2(PB39)
12JS4561 UV CUT FILTER(PB39)
12JS4591 POLARIZER R(PB39)
12JS4601 POLARIZER G(PB39)
12JS4611 POLARIZER B(PB39)
12JS4621 ANALYZER R(PB39)
12JS4631 ANALYZER G(PB39)
12JS4641 ANALYZER B(PB39)
* 12JS5061 SUB FILTER R(PB39)
* 12JS5071 SUB FILTER G(PB39)
* 12JS5081 SUB FILTER B(PB39)
* 24C02841 CABLE CLIP(FCA-10)
* 24C03431 SPACER(H=10)
24DT8831 TOP COVER ASSY (VT560)
24DT8851 BOTTOM COVER ASSY(VT660)
* 24F36891 SEPARATE BASE(B39)
* 24F36901 COVER A

11-21
VT560G
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
* 24F36911 COVER B
* 24F36921 COVER(OPT)
* 24F36932 HOLDER(FL)
* 24F36941 HOLDER(RL2)
* 24F36951 HOLDER(POLG)
* 24F36961 HOLDER(M1)
* 24F36971 DUCT A
* 24F37021 OPTBASE
* 24F37031 HOLDER(LAMP)
* 24F37041 COVER(LAMP)
* 24F37071 HOLDER(ANL)
24F37301 LAMP COVER
* 24F37311 HOLDER(FILTER)
* 24F37321 FILTER(REMOTE)
* 24F37331 INDICATOR A
* 24F37341 INDICATOR B
* 24F37351 FOOT F
* 24F37361 HOLDER(FOOT F)
* 24F37821 BARRIER(BASE)
24F38091 LENS CAP(PB39)
24FT8771 LAMP COVER ASSY (VT660)
24FT8781 HOLDER(FILTER)ASSY
24FT8881 DUCT A ASSY
24G08021 BUTTON(MENU)
24G08031 BUTTON(POWER)
24G08051 BUTTON(FOOT F)
* 24H43951 BRACKET(FL)
* 24H43961 BRACKET(RL2)
* 24H43971 BRACKET(IT1)
* 24H43981 BRACKET(IT2)
24H43991 SPRING(B39)
* 24H44001 BRACKET(PBS)
* 24H44011 PLATE(LCD)
* 24H44021 PLATE T(XDP)
* 24H44031 PLATE B(XDP)
* 24H44041 PLATE (LAMP)
* 24H44051 SHIELD(HOLDER)
* 24H44061 SHIELD(COVER)
* 24H44071 SHIELD(LAMP)
* 24H44091 PLATE(ANL)
* 24H44271 SPRING(FOOT F)
* 24H44282 BRACKET(I/O)
* 24H44301 BRACKET(SP)
* 24H44311 SHIELD(POWER)
* 24H44321 SHIELD(PS/BS)
* 24H44341 GUARD(FAN)
* 24H44751 SHIELDING PLATE(LAMP)
* 24H44761 SHIELD(BS)
* 24H44771 GUARD(BS)
* 24H46691 PLATE(K)
* 24H46701 BRACKET(TOP HOLD)
* 24H46711 PLATE UV
* 24H46871 SHIELD(IT)
* 24H46881 FIN(B)

11-22
VT560G
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
* 24HS3382 BRACKET(I/O)ASSY
* 24J20761 CUSHION(ZOOM)H
* 24J20771 CUSHION(ZOOM)V
* 24J20781 CUSHION(FOOT F)
* 24J20791 CUSHION(FOOT R)
* 24J20801 FILTER(SIDE)
* 24J20811 CUSHION(SP)A
* 24J20821 BARRIER(POWER)
* 24J20841 BARRIER(BS)
* 24J21461 CUSHION(SP)B
* 24J21471 CUSHION(F15)
* 24J21481 CUSHION A
* 24J21491 CUSHION(L)
* 24J21501 CUSHION(I)
* 24J21511 CUSHION(FAN)
* 24J21541 BARRIER(DC/BS)
* 24J21612 BARRIER(I/O)A
* 24J21751 CUSHION(I/O)B
* 24J21771 BARRIER(LAMP)
* 24J21841 CUSHION(F2)
* 24J21851 SHEET(A)
* 24J21861 SHEET(B)
* 24J21881 CUSHION(LED)
* 24J21901 TAPE(6*6*T0.23)
* 24J21911 CUSHION(I/O)C
* 24J21921 TAPE(7*4*T0.23)
* 24J22151 CUSHION(ANL)
* 24J22161 BARRIER(LAMP)
* 24J22171 BARRIER(FAN)
* 24J22181 BARRIER(DUCT)
* 24JS1612 BARRIER(I/O)ASSY
* 24K25451 DECORATED PLATE(I/O)
* 24K25471 FILTER(REMOTE)R
24L49461 NAME PLATE(VT560)
24L49521 CAUTION LABEL(LAMP)
24L50001 CAUTION LABEL(FILTER)
24L50011 CAUTION LABEL(LAMP COVER)
24L50021 CAUTION LABEL(LENZ4)
24L50191 CAUTION LABEL(SERVICE)
7N970019 EARTH PLATE(VTX60)
OPT 82G29111 OPTBASE(X LRL) SASSY
OPT 82G29131 OPTBASE(X RLR) SASSY
82G32211 IT1 SASSY
82G32221 IT2 SASSY
82G32231 PBS SASSY
82G32261 M1 SASSY
82G32271 POL G SASSY
82G32311 FIELD LENS SASSY
82G32321 RELAY LENS 2 SASSY
82G32691 BOTTOM SASSY
83G291A1 ENGINE ASSY (SERVICE VT560)
SRW109 91052036 SCREW,CFIMS*2*6*3KF
SRW110 91112013 SCREW,CBIMS*2*4*15KF
SRW090 91613061 SCREW,#2CBTS*3*10*15BF
SRW002 91613061 SCREW,#2CBTS*3*10*15BF
SRW020 91613061 SCREW,#2CBTS*3*10*15BF
11-23
VT560G
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
91663053 SCREW,#2CBRTS*3*8*15KF
SRW070 91663053 SCREW,#2CBRTS*3*8*15KF
SRW061 25851411 SCREW,CBIPS*3*10*15KF
SRW112 25851411 SCREW,CBIPS*3*10*15KF
SRW105 25851411 SCREW,CBIPS*3*10*15KF
SRW113 12851741 SPECIAL SCREW(PL-HM2.5*6)
SRW114 12851741 SPECIAL SCREW(PL-HM2.5*6)
SRW106 12851741 SPECIAL SCREW(PL-HM2.5*6)
SRW107 24N05751 CBIPS*2*4*15KF
24N05831 STUD(D-SUB)
24N06001 PUSHNUT(3.0)
24N06171 SPECIAL SCREW(M3*8.9)(SUS
SRW080 24N06201 STUD(M3/M2.5*H8.8)
SRW108 24N06221 PL-HHCS*3*10*15BF
SRW116 24N06361 SPECIAL SCREW(M3*4)
SRW117 24N06371 SPECIAL NUT(M4*H3.2)
SRW118 24N06381 SPECIAL WASHER(LWA*4)
SRW111 24N06521 CBIPS*2*5*15KF
9101311L CPIMS*3*20*3GF
SRW030 910D2533 SL-CPIMS*2.5*6*15KF
SRW060 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW081 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW082 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW083 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW102 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW103 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW104 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW003 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW004 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW005 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW006 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW010 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW011 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW012 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW013 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW014 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW031 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW032 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW103 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW101 910E2531 SCREW CPIMS*2.5*10*15BF
SRW001 910E3141 SCREW,PL-CPIMS*3*32*15BF

*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***


24N06281 SCREW(HANDLE M4)
68151006 ALKALINE BATTERY LR6(JE)
24C07231 DRIVER(M4)
24M18361 PROTECTION BAG(SCREW)
7N520013 CABLE USB (A-B) 1.8M SI
7N8P2431 VT60 QUICK GUIDE(U/G)
7N8P1611 WARRANTY(EUROPE)
7N950141 VT60 CD-ROM(U/M)
7N900381 REM-T HAND UNIT RD-394E
7N8P2441 VT60 IMPORTANT INFO(U/G)

11-24
VT560G
*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***
7N080005 POW CODE E2 L3.0 2.5A K
24F38031 HANDLE
24BS7201 SOFT CASE(VT660)
24M16171 PROTECTION BOX
24MU7971 SPACER(L)(VT660)
24MU7981 SPACER(R)(VT660)
24MU7991 PARTS BOX (VT660)
24MU8051 CARTON BOX (VT560)

*** ACCESSORIES(LT260) ***


7N520012 CABLE RGB, MD15P L1.8
24C05051 STRAP
24C04531 PUSH RIVET

Product number Product name

*** OPTION ***


01161072 VT60LP(replacement lamp)
01957616 VL-CA10MD
01957617 VL-CA02MD
01161013 VL-CA03V
01161042 CA03D
01161051 ADP-CV1
01161050 ADP-DT1

OPTION : When you need P/O the OPTION PARTS.


Please contact to Sales Department.

11-25
VT460G
6. VT460G
SYMBOL PART NO DESCRIPTION

*** PWB ASSYS ***


81G26F01 MAIN PWB ASSY

*** ELECTRICAL PARTS & MISCELLANEOUS PARTS ***


3N100371 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N100381 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N100391 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N170035 DC FAN TYF300J12
3N170036 DCFAN A33999-58NEC
3N170037 DCFAN D08A-12TG08A
3N670112 LCD LCX034CNB-8(R/G)
3N670121 LCD LCX034CPB-7(L/R)
3N670123 LCD LCX034CPB-6(L/B)
3N670111 LCD LCX034CNB-7(R/R)
3N670113 LCD LCX034CNB-6(R/B)
3N670122 LCD LCX034CPB-8(L/G)
3N810002 104JT-075-20206
6N300010 SPEAKER 40*40MM 4H 1W
7N530008 LAMP CABLE(CCT9402)L81,64
7N970022 THERMOSTATS (67L 120P)
7NW20019 CONNECTOR 2P L60
7NW3W023 CN 3P(CP1)220W,1015-22
7NW5W016 CONNECTOR 5P L170
7NWEW006 CONNECTOR 15P L150
82G32711 THERMOSTAT SASSY

*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***


* 16761791 SERIAL LABEL
* 18775141 LABEL,SERIAL MANUFACTURE
12JS2581 MIRROR 2(PB24)
12JS4491 RELAY LENS 1(PB39)
12JS4511 CONDENSER LENS-R(PB39)
12JS4521 CONDENSER LENS-G(PB39)
12JS4531 CONDENSER LENS-B(PB39)
12JS4541 DICHROIC MIRROR 1(PB39)
12JS4551 DICHROIC MIRROR 2(PB39)
12JS4561 UV CUT FILTER(PB39)
12JS4591 POLARIZER R(PB39)
12JS4601 POLARIZER G(PB39)
12JS4611 POLARIZER B(PB39)
12JS4621 ANALYZER R(PB39)
12JS4631 ANALYZER G(PB39)
12JS4641 ANALYZER B(PB39)
* 12JS5061 SUB FILTER R(PB39)
* 12JS5071 SUB FILTER G(PB39)
* 12JS5081 SUB FILTER B(PB39)
* 24C02841 CABLE CLIP(FCA-10)
* 24C03431 SPACER(H=10)
24DT8841 TOP COVER ASSY (VT460)
24DT8851 BOTTOM COVER ASSY(VT660)
* 24F36891 SEPARATE BASE(B39)
* 24F36901 COVER A

11-26
VT460G
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
* 24F36911 COVER B
* 24F36921 COVER(OPT)
* 24F36932 HOLDER(FL)
* 24F36941 HOLDER(RL2)
* 24F36951 HOLDER(POLG)
* 24F36961 HOLDER(M1)
* 24F36971 DUCT A
* 24F37021 OPTBASE
* 24F37031 HOLDER(LAMP)
* 24F37041 COVER(LAMP)
* 24F37071 HOLDER(ANL)
24F37301 LAMP COVER
* 24F37311 HOLDER(FILTER)
* 24F37321 FILTER(REMOTE)
* 24F37331 INDICATOR A
* 24F37341 INDICATOR B
* 24F37351 FOOT F
* 24F37361 HOLDER(FOOT F)
* 24F37821 BARRIER(BASE)
24F38091 LENS CAP(PB39)
24FT8771 LAMP COVER ASSY (VT660)
24FT8781 HOLDER(FILTER)ASSY
24FT8881 DUCT A ASSY
24G08021 BUTTON(MENU)
24G08031 BUTTON(POWER)
24G08051 BUTTON(FOOT F)
* 24H43951 BRACKET(FL)
* 24H43961 BRACKET(RL2)
* 24H43971 BRACKET(IT1)
* 24H43981 BRACKET(IT2)
24H43991 SPRING(B39)
* 24H44001 BRACKET(PBS)
* 24H45731 PLATE(S)
* 24H44021 PLATE T(XDP)
* 24H44031 PLATE B(XDP)
* 24H44041 PLATE (LAMP)
* 24H44051 SHIELD(HOLDER)
* 24H44061 SHIELD(COVER)
* 24H44071 SHIELD(LAMP)
* 24H44091 PLATE(ANL)
* 24H44271 SPRING(FOOT F)
* 24H44282 BRACKET(I/O)
* 24H44301 BRACKET(SP)
* 24H44311 SHIELD(POWER)
* 24H44321 SHIELD(PS/BS)
* 24H44341 GUARD(FAN)
* 24H44751 SHIELDING PLATE(LAMP)
* 24H44761 SHIELD(BS)
* 24H44771 GUARD(BS)
* 24H46691 PLATE(K)
* 24H46701 BRACKET(TOP HOLD)
* 24H46711 PLATE UV
* 24H46871 SHIELD(IT)
* 24H46881 FIN(B)

11-27
VT460G
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
* 24HS3382 BRACKET(I/O)ASSY
* 24J20761 CUSHION(ZOOM)H
* 24J20771 CUSHION(ZOOM)V
* 24J20781 CUSHION(FOOT F)
* 24J20791 CUSHION(FOOT R)
* 24J20801 FILTER(SIDE)
* 24J20811 CUSHION(SP)A
* 24J20821 BARRIER(POWER)
* 24J20841 BARRIER(BS)
* 24J21461 CUSHION(SP)B
* 24J21471 CUSHION(F15)
* 24J21481 CUSHION A
* 24J21491 CUSHION(L)
* 24J21501 CUSHION(I)
* 24J21511 CUSHION(FAN)
* 24J21541 BARRIER(DC/BS)
* 24J21612 BARRIER(I/O)A
* 24J21751 CUSHION(I/O)B
* 24J21771 BARRIER(LAMP)
* 24J21841 CUSHION(F2)
* 24J21851 SHEET(A)
* 24J21861 SHEET(B)
* 24J21881 CUSHION(LED)
* 24J21901 TAPE(6*6*T0.23)
* 24J21911 CUSHION(I/O)C
* 24J21921 TAPE(7*4*T0.23)
* 24J22151 CUSHION(ANL)
* 24J22161 BARRIER(LAMP)
* 24J22171 BARRIER(FAN)
* 24J22181 BARRIER(DUCT)
* 24JS1612 BARRIER(I/O)ASSY
* 24K25451 DECORATED PLATE(I/O)
* 24K25471 FILTER(REMOTE)R
24L49481 NAME PLATE(VT460)
24L49521 CAUTION LABEL(LAMP)
24L50001 CAUTION LABEL(FILTER)
24L50011 CAUTION LABEL(LAMP COVER)
24L50021 CAUTION LABEL(LENZ4)
24L50191 CAUTION LABEL(SERVICE)
7N970019 EARTH PLATE(VTX60)
OPT 82G26111 OPTBASE(S LRL) SASSY
OPT 82G26131 OPTBASE(S RLR) SASSY
82G32211 IT1 SASSY
82G32221 IT2 SASSY
82G32231 PBS SASSY
82G32261 M1 SASSY
82G32271 POL G SASSY
82G32311 FIELD LENS SASSY
82G32321 RELAY LENS 2 SASSY
82G32691 BOTTOM SASSY
83G261A1 ENGINE ASSY (SERVICE VT460)
SRW109 91051033 CFIMS*1.7*6*15KF
SRW110 91112013 SCREW,CBIMS*2*4*15KF
SRW090 91613061 SCREW,#2CBTS*3*10*15BF
SRW002 91613061 SCREW,#2CBTS*3*10*15BF
SRW020 91613061 SCREW,#2CBTS*3*10*15BF
11-28
VT460G
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
91663053 SCREW,#2CBRTS*3*8*15KF
SRW070 91663053 SCREW,#2CBRTS*3*8*15KF
SRW061 25851411 SCREW,CBIPS*3*10*15KF
SRW112 25851411 SCREW,CBIPS*3*10*15KF
SRW105 25851411 SCREW,CBIPS*3*10*15KF
SRW113 12851741 SPECIAL SCREW(PL-HM2.5*6)
SRW114 12851741 SPECIAL SCREW(PL-HM2.5*6)
SRW106 12851741 SPECIAL SCREW(PL-HM2.5*6)
SRW107 24N05751 CBIPS*2*4*15KF
24N05831 STUD(D-SUB)
24N06001 PUSHNUT(3.0)
24N06171 SPECIAL SCREW(M3*8.9)(SUS
SRW080 24N06201 STUD(M3/M2.5*H8.8)
SRW108 24N06221 PL-HHCS*3*10*15BF
SRW116 24N06361 SPECIAL SCREW(M3*4)
SRW117 24N06371 SPECIAL NUT(M4*H3.2)
SRW118 24N06381 SPECIAL WASHER(LWA*4)
SRW111 24N06521 CBIPS*2*5*15KF
9101311L CPIMS*3*20*3GF
SRW030 910D2533 SL-CPIMS*2.5*6*15KF
SRW060 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW081 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW082 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW083 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW102 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW103 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW104 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW003 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW004 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW005 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW006 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW010 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW011 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW012 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW013 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW014 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW031 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW032 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW103 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW101 910E2531 SCREW CPIMS*2.5*10*15BF
SRW001 910E3141 SCREW,PL-CPIMS*3*32*15BF

*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***


24N06281 SCREW(HANDLE M4)
68151006 ALKALINE BATTERY LR6(JE)
24C07231 DRIVER(M4)
24M18361 PROTECTION BAG(SCREW)
7N520013 CABLE USB (A-B) 1.8M SI
7N8P2431 VT60 QUICK GUIDE(U/G)
7N8P1611 WARRANTY(EUROPE)
7N950141 VT60 CD-ROM(U/M)
7N900381 REM-T HAND UNIT RD-394E
7N8P2441 VT60 IMPORTANT INFO(U/G)

11-29
VT460G
*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***
7N080005 POW CODE E2 L3.0 2.5A K
24F38031 HANDLE
24BS7201 SOFT CASE(VT660)
24M16171 PROTECTION BOX
24MU7971 SPACER(L)(VT660)
24MU7981 SPACER(R)(VT660)
24MU7991 PARTS BOX (VT660)
24MU8091 CARTON BOX (VT460)

*** ACCESSORIES(LT260) ***


7N520012 CABLE RGB, MD15P L1.8
24C05051 STRAP
24C04531 PUSH RIVET

Product number Product name

*** OPTION ***


01161072 VT60LP(replacement lamp)
01957616 VL-CA10MD
01957617 VL-CA02MD
01161013 VL-CA03V
01161042 CA03D
01161051 ADP-CV1
01161050 ADP-DT1

OPTION : When you need P/O the OPTION PARTS.


Please contact to Sales Department.

11-30
VT660J
7. VT660J
SYMBOL PART NO DESCRIPTION

*** PWB ASSYS ***


81G32F02 MAIN PWB ASSY

*** ELECTRICAL PARTS & MISCELLANEOUS PARTS ***


3N100371 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N100381 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N100391 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N170035 DC FAN TYF300J12
3N170036 DCFAN A33999-58NEC
3N170037 DCFAN D08A-12TG08A
3N670097 LCD L3P07X-45G00R
3N670098 LCD L3P07X-45G00G
3N670099 LCD L3P07X-45G00B
3N670107 LCD L3P07X-46G00R
3N670108 LCD L3P07X-46G00G
3N670109 LCD L3P07X-46G00B
3N810002 104JT-075-20206
6N300010 SPEAKER 40*40MM 4H 1W
7N530008 LAMP CABLE(CCT9402)L81,64
7N970022 THERMOSTATS (67L 120P)
7NW20019 CONNECTOR 2P L60
7NW3W023 CN 3P(CP1)220W,1015-22
7NW5W016 CONNECTOR 5P L170
7NWEW006 CONNECTOR 15P L150
82G32711 THERMOSTAT SASSY

*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***


* 16761791 SERIAL LABEL
* 18775141 LABEL,SERIAL MANUFACTURE
12JS2581 MIRROR 2(PB24)
12JS4491 RELAY LENS 1(PB39)
12JS4511 CONDENSER LENS-R(PB39)
12JS4521 CONDENSER LENS-G(PB39)
12JS4531 CONDENSER LENS-B(PB39)
12JS4541 DICHROIC MIRROR 1(PB39)
12JS4551 DICHROIC MIRROR 2(PB39)
12JS4561 UV CUT FILTER(PB39)
12JS4591 POLARIZER R(PB39)
12JS4601 POLARIZER G(PB39)
12JS4611 POLARIZER B(PB39)
12JS4621 ANALYZER R(PB39)
12JS4631 ANALYZER G(PB39)
12JS4641 ANALYZER B(PB39)
* 12JS5061 SUB FILTER R(PB39)
* 12JS5071 SUB FILTER G(PB39)
* 12JS5081 SUB FILTER B(PB39)
* 24C02841 CABLE CLIP(FCA-10)
* 24C03431 SPACER(H=10)
24DT8821 TOP COVER ASSY (VT660)
24DT8851 BOTTOM COVER ASSY(VT660)
* 24F36891 SEPARATE BASE(B39)
* 24F36901 COVER A

11-31
VT660J
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
* 24F36911 COVER B
* 24F36921 COVER(OPT)
* 24F36932 HOLDER(FL)
* 24F36941 HOLDER(RL2)
* 24F36951 HOLDER(POLG)
* 24F36961 HOLDER(M1)
* 24F36971 DUCT A
* 24F37021 OPTBASE
* 24F37031 HOLDER(LAMP)
* 24F37041 COVER(LAMP)
* 24F37071 HOLDER(ANL)
24F37301 LAMP COVER
* 24F37311 HOLDER(FILTER)
* 24F37321 FILTER(REMOTE)
* 24F37331 INDICATOR A
* 24F37341 INDICATOR B
* 24F37351 FOOT F
* 24F37361 HOLDER(FOOT F)
* 24F37821 BARRIER(BASE)
24F38091 LENS CAP(PB39)
24FT8771 LAMP COVER ASSY (VT660)
24FT8781 HOLDER(FILTER)ASSY
24FT8881 DUCT A ASSY
24G08021 BUTTON(MENU)
24G08031 BUTTON(POWER)
24G08051 BUTTON(FOOT F)
* 24H43951 BRACKET(FL)
* 24H43961 BRACKET(RL2)
* 24H43971 BRACKET(IT1)
* 24H43981 BRACKET(IT2)
24H43991 SPRING(B39)
* 24H44001 BRACKET(PBS)
* 24H44011 PLATE(LCD)
* 24H44021 PLATE T(XDP)
* 24H44031 PLATE B(XDP)
* 24H44041 PLATE (LAMP)
* 24H44051 SHIELD(HOLDER)
* 24H44061 SHIELD(COVER)
* 24H44071 SHIELD(LAMP)
* 24H44091 PLATE(ANL)
* 24H44271 SPRING(FOOT F)
* 24H44282 BRACKET(I/O)
* 24H44301 BRACKET(SP)
* 24H44311 SHIELD(POWER)
* 24H44321 SHIELD(PS/BS)
* 24H44341 GUARD(FAN)
* 24H44751 SHIELDING PLATE(LAMP)
* 24H44761 SHIELD(BS)
* 24H44771 GUARD(BS)
* 24H46691 PLATE(K)
* 24H46701 BRACKET(TOP HOLD)
* 24H46711 PLATE UV
* 24H46871 SHIELD(IT)
* 24H46881 FIN(B)

11-32
VT660J
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
* 24HS3382 BRACKET(I/O)ASSY
* 24J20761 CUSHION(ZOOM)H
* 24J20771 CUSHION(ZOOM)V
* 24J20781 CUSHION(FOOT F)
* 24J20791 CUSHION(FOOT R)
* 24J20801 FILTER(SIDE)
* 24J20811 CUSHION(SP)A
* 24J20821 BARRIER(POWER)
* 24J20841 BARRIER(BS)
* 24J21461 CUSHION(SP)B
* 24J21471 CUSHION(F15)
* 24J21481 CUSHION A
* 24J21491 CUSHION(L)
* 24J21501 CUSHION(I)
* 24J21511 CUSHION(FAN)
* 24J21541 BARRIER(DC/BS)
* 24J21612 BARRIER(I/O)A
* 24J21751 CUSHION(I/O)B
* 24J21771 BARRIER(LAMP)
* 24J21841 CUSHION(F2)
* 24J21851 SHEET(A)
* 24J21861 SHEET(B)
* 24J21881 CUSHION(LED)
* 24J21901 TAPE(6*6*T0.23)
* 24J21911 CUSHION(I/O)C
* 24J21921 TAPE(7*4*T0.23)
* 24J22151 CUSHION(ANL)
* 24J22161 BARRIER(LAMP)
* 24J22171 BARRIER(FAN)
* 24J22181 BARRIER(DUCT)
* 24JS1612 BARRIER(I/O)ASSY
* 24K25451 DECORATED PLATE(I/O)
* 24K25471 FILTER(REMOTE)R
24L49441 NAME PLATE(VT660)
24L49521 CAUTION LABEL(LAMP)
24L50001 CAUTION LABEL(FILTER)
24L50011 CAUTION LABEL(LAMP COVER)
24L50021 CAUTION LABEL(LENZ4)
24L50191 CAUTION LABEL(SERVICE)
7N970019 EARTH PLATE(VTX60)
OPT 82G32111 OPTBASE(MLA LRL) SASSY
OPT 82G32131 OPTBASE(MLA RLR) SASSY
82G32211 IT1 SASSY
82G32221 IT2 SASSY
82G32231 PBS SASSY
82G32261 M1 SASSY
82G32271 POL G SASSY
82G32311 FIELD LENS SASSY
82G32321 RELAY LENS 2 SASSY
82G32691 BOTTOM SASSY
83G321A1 ENGINE ASSY (SERVICE VT660)
SRW109 91052036 SCREW,CFIMS*2*6*3KF
SRW110 91112013 SCREW,CBIMS*2*4*15KF
SRW090 91613061 SCREW,#2CBTS*3*10*15BF
SRW002 91613061 SCREW,#2CBTS*3*10*15BF
SRW020 91613061 SCREW,#2CBTS*3*10*15BF
11-33
VT660J
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
91663053 SCREW,#2CBRTS*3*8*15KF
SRW070 91663053 SCREW,#2CBRTS*3*8*15KF
SRW061 25851411 SCREW,CBIPS*3*10*15KF
SRW112 25851411 SCREW,CBIPS*3*10*15KF
SRW105 25851411 SCREW,CBIPS*3*10*15KF
SRW113 12851741 SPECIAL SCREW(PL-HM2.5*6)
SRW114 12851741 SPECIAL SCREW(PL-HM2.5*6)
SRW106 12851741 SPECIAL SCREW(PL-HM2.5*6)
SRW107 24N05751 CBIPS*2*4*15KF
24N05831 STUD(D-SUB)
24N06001 PUSHNUT(3.0)
24N06171 SPECIAL SCREW(M3*8.9)(SUS
SRW080 24N06201 STUD(M3/M2.5*H8.8)
SRW108 24N06221 PL-HHCS*3*10*15BF
SRW116 24N06361 SPECIAL SCREW(M3*4)
SRW117 24N06371 SPECIAL NUT(M4*H3.2)
SRW118 24N06381 SPECIAL WASHER(LWA*4)
SRW111 24N06521 CBIPS*2*5*15KF
9101311L CPIMS*3*20*3GF
SRW030 910D2533 SL-CPIMS*2.5*6*15KF
SRW060 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW081 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW082 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW083 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW102 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW103 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW104 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW003 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW004 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW005 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW006 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW010 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW011 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW012 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW013 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW014 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW031 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW032 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW103 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW101 910E2531 SCREW CPIMS*2.5*10*15BF
SRW001 910E3141 SCREW,PL-CPIMS*3*32*15BF

*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***


24N06281 SCREW(HANDLE M4)
68151006 ALKALINE BATTERY LR6(JE)
24C07231 DRIVER(M4)
24M18361 PROTECTION BAG(SCREW)
7N520013 CABLE USB (A-B) 1.8M SI
24L11331 LABEL (8*28)
78047921 WARRANTY ENVELOPE(100*220
7N8P0023 PROJECTOR WARRANTY
7N900381 REM-T HAND UNIT RD-394E
7N8P2392 VT60J USER MANUAL

11-34
VT660J
*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***
7N080112 POWER CODE J2 L3.0 7.0A K
7N8P0013 SERVICE MO ICHIRANHYOU
7N8P0961 VLC REGISTRATION
7N8P2401 VT60J QUICK GUIDE
24F38031 HANDLE
24BS7201 SOFT CASE(VT660)
24M16171 PROTECTION BOX
24MU7971 SPACER(L)(VT660)
24MU7981 SPACER(R)(VT660)
24MU7991 PARTS BOX (VT660)
24MU8021 CARTON BOX (VT660J)

*** ACCESSORIES(LT260) ***


7N520012 CABLE RGB, MD15P L1.8
24C05051 STRAP
24C04531 PUSH RIVET

Product number Product name

*** OPTION ***


01161072 VT60LP(replacement lamp)
01957616 VL-CA10MD
01957617 VL-CA02MD
01161013 VL-CA03V
01161042 CA03D
01161051 ADP-CV1
01161050 ADP-DT1

OPTION : When you need P/O the OPTION PARTS.


Please contact to Sales Department.

11-35
VT460J
8. VT460J
SYMBOL PART NO DESCRIPTION

*** PWB ASSYS ***


81G26F01 MAIN PWB ASSY

*** ELECTRICAL PARTS & MISCELLANEOUS PARTS ***


3N100371 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N100381 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N100391 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
3N170035 DC FAN TYF300J12
3N170036 DCFAN A33999-58NEC
3N170037 DCFAN D08A-12TG08A
3N670112 LCD LCX034CNB-8(R/G)
3N670121 LCD LCX034CPB-7(L/R)
3N670123 LCD LCX034CPB-6(L/B)
3N670111 LCD LCX034CNB-7(R/R)
3N670113 LCD LCX034CNB-6(R/B)
3N670122 LCD LCX034CPB-8(L/G)
3N810002 104JT-075-20206
6N300010 SPEAKER 40*40MM 4H 1W
7N530008 LAMP CABLE(CCT9402)L81,64
7N970022 THERMOSTATS (67L 120P)
7NW20019 CONNECTOR 2P L60
7NW3W023 CN 3P(CP1)220W,1015-22
7NW5W016 CONNECTOR 5P L170
7NWEW006 CONNECTOR 15P L150
82G32711 THERMOSTAT SASSY

*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***


* 16761791 SERIAL LABEL
* 18775141 LABEL,SERIAL MANUFACTURE
12JS2581 MIRROR 2(PB24)
12JS4491 RELAY LENS 1(PB39)
12JS4511 CONDENSER LENS-R(PB39)
12JS4521 CONDENSER LENS-G(PB39)
12JS4531 CONDENSER LENS-B(PB39)
12JS4541 DICHROIC MIRROR 1(PB39)
12JS4551 DICHROIC MIRROR 2(PB39)
12JS4561 UV CUT FILTER(PB39)
12JS4591 POLARIZER R(PB39)
12JS4601 POLARIZER G(PB39)
12JS4611 POLARIZER B(PB39)
12JS4621 ANALYZER R(PB39)
12JS4631 ANALYZER G(PB39)
12JS4641 ANALYZER B(PB39)
* 12JS5061 SUB FILTER R(PB39)
* 12JS5071 SUB FILTER G(PB39)
* 12JS5081 SUB FILTER B(PB39)
* 24C02841 CABLE CLIP(FCA-10)
* 24C03431 SPACER(H=10)
24DT8841 TOP COVER ASSY (VT460)
24DT8851 BOTTOM COVER ASSY(VT660)
* 24F36891 SEPARATE BASE(B39)
* 24F36901 COVER A

11-36
VT460J
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
* 24F36911 COVER B
* 24F36921 COVER(OPT)
* 24F36932 HOLDER(FL)
* 24F36941 HOLDER(RL2)
* 24F36951 HOLDER(POLG)
* 24F36961 HOLDER(M1)
* 24F36971 DUCT A
* 24F37021 OPTBASE
* 24F37031 HOLDER(LAMP)
* 24F37041 COVER(LAMP)
* 24F37071 HOLDER(ANL)
24F37301 LAMP COVER
* 24F37311 HOLDER(FILTER)
* 24F37321 FILTER(REMOTE)
* 24F37331 INDICATOR A
* 24F37341 INDICATOR B
* 24F37351 FOOT F
* 24F37361 HOLDER(FOOT F)
* 24F37821 BARRIER(BASE)
24F38091 LENS CAP(PB39)
24FT8771 LAMP COVER ASSY (VT660)
24FT8781 HOLDER(FILTER)ASSY
24FT8881 DUCT A ASSY
24G08021 BUTTON(MENU)
24G08031 BUTTON(POWER)
24G08051 BUTTON(FOOT F)
* 24H43951 BRACKET(FL)
* 24H43961 BRACKET(RL2)
* 24H43971 BRACKET(IT1)
* 24H43981 BRACKET(IT2)
24H43991 SPRING(B39)
* 24H44001 BRACKET(PBS)
* 24H45731 PLATE(S)
* 24H44021 PLATE T(XDP)
* 24H44031 PLATE B(XDP)
* 24H44041 PLATE (LAMP)
* 24H44051 SHIELD(HOLDER)
* 24H44061 SHIELD(COVER)
* 24H44071 SHIELD(LAMP)
* 24H44091 PLATE(ANL)
* 24H44271 SPRING(FOOT F)
* 24H44282 BRACKET(I/O)
* 24H44301 BRACKET(SP)
* 24H44311 SHIELD(POWER)
* 24H44321 SHIELD(PS/BS)
* 24H44341 GUARD(FAN)
* 24H44751 SHIELDING PLATE(LAMP)
* 24H44761 SHIELD(BS)
* 24H44771 GUARD(BS)
* 24H46691 PLATE(K)
* 24H46701 BRACKET(TOP HOLD)
* 24H46711 PLATE UV
* 24H46871 SHIELD(IT)
* 24H46881 FIN(B)

11-37
VT460J
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
* 24HS3382 BRACKET(I/O)ASSY
* 24J20761 CUSHION(ZOOM)H
* 24J20771 CUSHION(ZOOM)V
* 24J20781 CUSHION(FOOT F)
* 24J20791 CUSHION(FOOT R)
* 24J20801 FILTER(SIDE)
* 24J20811 CUSHION(SP)A
* 24J20821 BARRIER(POWER)
* 24J20841 BARRIER(BS)
* 24J21461 CUSHION(SP)B
* 24J21471 CUSHION(F15)
* 24J21481 CUSHION A
* 24J21491 CUSHION(L)
* 24J21501 CUSHION(I)
* 24J21511 CUSHION(FAN)
* 24J21541 BARRIER(DC/BS)
* 24J21612 BARRIER(I/O)A
* 24J21751 CUSHION(I/O)B
* 24J21771 BARRIER(LAMP)
* 24J21841 CUSHION(F2)
* 24J21851 SHEET(A)
* 24J21861 SHEET(B)
* 24J21881 CUSHION(LED)
* 24J21901 TAPE(6*6*T0.23)
* 24J21911 CUSHION(I/O)C
* 24J21921 TAPE(7*4*T0.23)
* 24J22151 CUSHION(ANL)
* 24J22161 BARRIER(LAMP)
* 24J22171 BARRIER(FAN)
* 24J22181 BARRIER(DUCT)
* 24JS1612 BARRIER(I/O)ASSY
* 24K25451 DECORATED PLATE(I/O)
* 24K25471 FILTER(REMOTE)R
24L49481 NAME PLATE(VT460)
24L49521 CAUTION LABEL(LAMP)
24L50001 CAUTION LABEL(FILTER)
24L50011 CAUTION LABEL(LAMP COVER)
24L50021 CAUTION LABEL(LENZ4)
24L50191 CAUTION LABEL(SERVICE)
7N970019 EARTH PLATE(VTX60)
OPT 82G26111 OPTBASE(S LRL) SASSY
OPT 82G26131 OPTBASE(S RLR) SASSY
82G32211 IT1 SASSY
82G32221 IT2 SASSY
82G32231 PBS SASSY
82G32261 M1 SASSY
82G32271 POL G SASSY
82G32311 FIELD LENS SASSY
82G32321 RELAY LENS 2 SASSY
82G32691 BOTTOM SASSY
83G261A1 ENGINE ASSY (SERVICE VT460)
SRW109 91051033 CFIMS*1.7*6*15KF
SRW110 91112013 SCREW,CBIMS*2*4*15KF
SRW090 91613061 SCREW,#2CBTS*3*10*15BF
SRW002 91613061 SCREW,#2CBTS*3*10*15BF
SRW020 91613061 SCREW,#2CBTS*3*10*15BF
11-38
VT460J
*** APPEARANCE PARTS ***
91663053 SCREW,#2CBRTS*3*8*15KF
SRW070 91663053 SCREW,#2CBRTS*3*8*15KF
SRW061 25851411 SCREW,CBIPS*3*10*15KF
SRW112 25851411 SCREW,CBIPS*3*10*15KF
SRW105 25851411 SCREW,CBIPS*3*10*15KF
SRW113 12851741 SPECIAL SCREW(PL-HM2.5*6)
SRW114 12851741 SPECIAL SCREW(PL-HM2.5*6)
SRW106 12851741 SPECIAL SCREW(PL-HM2.5*6)
SRW107 24N05751 CBIPS*2*4*15KF
24N05831 STUD(D-SUB)
24N06001 PUSHNUT(3.0)
24N06171 SPECIAL SCREW(M3*8.9)(SUS
SRW080 24N06201 STUD(M3/M2.5*H8.8)
SRW108 24N06221 PL-HHCS*3*10*15BF
SRW116 24N06361 SPECIAL SCREW(M3*4)
SRW117 24N06371 SPECIAL NUT(M4*H3.2)
SRW118 24N06381 SPECIAL WASHER(LWA*4)
SRW111 24N06521 CBIPS*2*5*15KF
9101311L CPIMS*3*20*3GF
SRW030 910D2533 SL-CPIMS*2.5*6*15KF
SRW060 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW081 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW082 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW083 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW102 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW103 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW104 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW003 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW004 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW005 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW006 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW010 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW011 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW012 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW013 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW014 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW031 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW032 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW103 910E251L PL-CPIMS*2.5*6*3GF
SRW101 910E2531 SCREW CPIMS*2.5*10*15BF
SRW001 910E3141 SCREW,PL-CPIMS*3*32*15BF

*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***


24N06281 SCREW(HANDLE M4)
68151006 ALKALINE BATTERY LR6(JE)
24C07231 DRIVER(M4)
24M18361 PROTECTION BAG(SCREW)
7N520013 CABLE USB (A-B) 1.8M SI
24L11331 LABEL (8*28)
78047921 WARRANTY ENVELOPE(100*220
7N8P0023 PROJECTOR WARRANTY
7N900381 REM-T HAND UNIT RD-394E
7N8P2392 VT60J USER MANUAL

11-39
VT460J
*** PRINTED & PACKING MATERIALS ***
7N080112 POWER CODE J2 L3.0 7.0A K
7N8P0013 SERVICE MO ICHIRANHYOU
7N8P0961 VLC REGISTRATION
7N8P2401 VT60J QUICK GUIDE
24F38031 HANDLE
24BS7201 SOFT CASE(VT660)
24M16171 PROTECTION BOX
24MU7971 SPACER(L)(VT660)
24MU7981 SPACER(R)(VT660)
24MU7991 PARTS BOX (VT660)
24MU8101 CARTON BOX (VT460J)

*** ACCESSORIES(LT260) ***


7N520012 CABLE RGB, MD15P L1.8
24C05051 STRAP
24C04531 PUSH RIVET

Product number Product name

*** OPTION ***


01161072 VT60LP(replacement lamp)
01957616 VL-CA10MD
01957617 VL-CA02MD
01161013 VL-CA03V
01161042 CA03D
01161051 ADP-CV1
01161050 ADP-DT1

OPTION : When you need P/O the OPTION PARTS.


Please contact to Sales Department.

11-40
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
POWER
SUPPLY * VT460 Only LCD PANNEL (SVGA)
PORS
1 +3.4V 9 GND 1 1 1 +3.4V 9 GND 1 PSIG 13 HST 1 1 1 PSIG 13 HST
2 +3.4V 10 GND 2 2 2 +3.4V 10 GND 2 SIG4 14 HCK 2 POGS 2 2 SIG4 14 HCK
3 +3.4V 11 +14.0V POPW 3 +3.4V 11 +14.0V 3 SIG3 15 HCKX POBS 3 SIG3 15 HCKX
4 GND 12 +14.0V 4 GND 12 +14.0V 4 SIG5 16 VSS 4 SIG5 16 VSS
5 GND 13 GND 5 GND 13 GND 5 SIG2 17 N. C. 5 SIG2 17 N. C.
6 GND 14 +17.0V 14 14 6 GND 14 +17.0V 6 SIG6 18 ENB 23 23 6 SIG6 18 ENB
7 +6.2V 15 GND 15 15 7 +6.2V 15 GND 7 SIG1 19 VCK 24 24 7 SIG1 19 VCK
8 +6.2V 8 +6.2V 8 HVDD 20 VST 8 HVDD 20 VST
9 RGT 21 PCG 9 RGT 21 PCG
LAMP_DET 1 1 LAMP_DET 10 CLR 22 DWN 10 CLR 22 DWN
GND 2 POLC 2 GND 11 N. C. 23 VVDD 11 N. C. 23 VVDD
+3.3V 3 3 +3.3V 12 N. C. 24 COM 12 N. C. 24 COM
LAMP_PW 4 4 LAMP_PW
LAMP_CTL 5 5 LAMP_CTL

1 GND 19 SDA MAIN PWB * VT560/660 Only LCD PANNEL (XGA)


2 ALIN 20 SCL POPR
I/O PWB 3 GND 21 GND (PWC 4541/6A) 1 N. C. 16 VDDX 1 1 1 N. C. 16 VDDX
4 ARIN 22 5VIN 2 DY 17 DX 2 POPG 2 2 DY 17 DX
(PWC 4541/6B) 5 GND 23 GND 3 CLY 18 VSSX POPB 3 CLY 18 VSSX
6 ALOUT 24 ROUT 4 CLYB 19 VID1 4 CLYB 19 VID1
1 GND 19 SDA 1 1 7 JSW 25 GND 5 VDDY 20 VID2 5 VDDY 20 VID2
2 ALIN 20 SCL 2 2 8 AROUT 26 GOUT 6 LCCOM 21 VID3 29 29 6 LCCOM 21 VID3
3 GND 21 GND POIB 9 GND 27 GND 7 N. C. 22 VID4 30 30 7 N. C. 22 VID4
4 ARIN 22 5VIN 10 RIN 28 BOUT 8 NRG 23 VID5 8 NRG 23 VID5
5 GND 23 GND 11 GND 29 GND 9 ENB1 24 VID6 9 ENB1 24 VID6
6 ALOUT 24 ROUT 35 35 12 GIN 30 HOUT 10 ENB2 25 N. C. 10 ENB2 25 N. C.
7 JSW 25 GND 36 36 13 GND 31 GND 11 ENB3 26 LCCOM 11 ENB3 26 LCCOM
8 AROUT 26 GOUT 14 BIN 32 VOUT 12 ENB4 27 DIRY 12 ENB4 27 DIRY
9 GND 27 GND 15 GND 33 THRM2 13 DIRX 28 VSSY 13 DIRX 28 VSSY
10 RIN 28 BOUT 16 HIN 34 +3.3V 14 CLX 29 DY 14 CLX 29 DY
11 GND 29 GND 17 SCART 35 GND 15 CLXB 30 MON 15 CLXB 30 MON
12 GIN 30 HOUT 18 VIN 36 REM
13 GND 31 GND

STBY OUT
3 FAN_DET

3 FAN_DET

3 FAN_DET
14 BIN 32 VOUT

STBY IN
15 GND 33 THRM2

1 AUD+
3 AUD-
16 HIN 34 +3.3V AIN 1
2 GND

2 GND

2 GND
1 VCC

1 VCC

1 VCC

2 N.C.
17 SCART 35 GND GND 2
18 VIN 36 REM

1
2
POT2 POF1 POF2 POF3 POSP POBM
1
2

1
2
3

1
2
3

1
2
3

1
2
3

1
2
GND

VCC
GND

VCC
GND

VCC
GND
FAN_DET

FAN_DET

FAN_DET

AUD+

STBY OUT
STBY IN
AIN

AUD-
N.C.
LAMP LCD LAMP EXHAUST
THERMISTOR FAN FAN FAN SPEAKER BIMETAL

12-1
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
200W/160W
VIDEO IN
BLOCK DIAGRAM +17V

X'tal
PIXCLK= +14V PS BALLAST
X'tal SVGA : 40MHz
S-VIDEO IN 24.576MHz
PIXCLK
XGA : 63.6MHz
+6.2V UNIT UNIT LAMP
+3.4V HOUSE

CSV IC30000 H/V


Exhaust
Y/C SAA7118 VCLK FAN
3 STATUS
THERMISTOR (LAMP) StandBy (Video Dec) IC7001
DATA LED (G/R)
Vcc SLA5075
THRM 3
(Tiny Cell) SIGNAL
2 FAN
LED (G)
RGB OUT IC1002 YPbPr
NJM2581 (480i) I2C IC5004 IC5006
(RGB Amp) BUS2 LH28F800 Panel FAN
PW164B-10 (Flash
(Pixel Works) ROM) FAN
RGB IN IC2002 CLP Control
RGB/YPbPr LPF AD9883 GCLK Circuit
IC5003 Sirocco
(ADC) I2C FAN
H/V DATA
BUS1
CAT24WC32
(EEPROM) LCD FAN

IC1001 IC2001
2LineSer. BR24C21 M52347 H/V I2C
DETECT SW
AUDIO OUT (P&P) (SyncSep) BUS2
(LAMP Sirocco
FAN
COVER)
L/R CPU H/V DATA CLK RST *VT560/VT660 Only
CLK 0.7"LCD
*VT460 : VT460 SVGA
RGB AUDIO IN X't al IC9001~3 CXA7000R VT560 XGA
1 20MHz AD8381
I2C VT660 XGAw/M
L/R
BUS2 (Driver)
CPU
IC8001
PWC 454xB (I/O) BUS
BD4725
REM (Reset) IC9501~3
VCOM
VIDEO AUDIO IN
(FRONT/ IC8002 L3E01040F
IC4005 REAR) 2 (L/S)
L/R NJW1142
REM UPD85027 *VT560/VT660
(Audio CTL) 12 (UniSix) Only
S-VIDEO AUDIO SW X'tal IC9005
IN 6MHz M62393
L/R (D/A)
IC6006
MONO ADM3202 TxD IC6003 I2C
RxD REM S3C9658
(Serial Reciver) BUS2
1W/4 SPEAKER (IR Receiver) IC6005 IC7002
AD7417 MXA2500
IC4014 MOUSE (ThermoSensor)
PC (Gsensor)
TDA7056 CONTROL OUT
(Audio AMP) PWC 4541A/4546A (MAIN) THRM
2

13-1
01150141 (VT660)
01150145 (VT560)
01150149 (VT460)
01150142 (VT660G)
01150146 (VT560G)
01150150 (VT460G)
01151048 (VT660J)
01151050 (VT460J)